WO2022082687A1 - 数据传输方法、装置、可读存储介质和系统 - Google Patents
数据传输方法、装置、可读存储介质和系统 Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2022082687A1 WO2022082687A1 PCT/CN2020/123021 CN2020123021W WO2022082687A1 WO 2022082687 A1 WO2022082687 A1 WO 2022082687A1 CN 2020123021 W CN2020123021 W CN 2020123021W WO 2022082687 A1 WO2022082687 A1 WO 2022082687A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- terminal device
- indication information
- configuration information
- network device
- reference signal
- Prior art date
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W24/00—Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
- H04W24/08—Testing, supervising or monitoring using real traffic
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
- Y02D—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
- Y02D30/00—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
- Y02D30/70—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks
Definitions
- the present application relates to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a data transmission method, device, readable storage medium and system.
- IoT Internet of Things
- NB-IoT Narrow Band Internet of Things
- mMTC Massive Machine Type Communication
- Typical IoT applications include various aspects such as smart grid, smart agriculture, smart transportation, smart home, and environmental detection. Because the Internet of Things needs to be applied in a variety of scenarios, such as from outdoor to indoor, from above ground to underground, many special requirements are put forward for the design of the Internet of Things. End devices in the Internet of Things spend most of their time in an idle state. Occasionally, it is necessary to report some status information, such as the status of street lights, the status of water and electricity meters, etc.
- the network device may allocate pre-configured resources (eg, pre-configured uplink resource, PUR) to the terminal device.
- pre-configured resources eg, pre-configured uplink resource, PUR
- pre-configured resources and network devices can be used for transmission.
- EPC evolved packet core
- the present application provides a data transmission method, apparatus, readable storage medium and system, which are used to enable a terminal device in an RRC inactive state or an RRC idle state to perform data transmission, thereby reducing power consumption and signaling overhead.
- the terminal device receives resource configuration information from the network device, the terminal device determines the target beam, the target beam includes at least one of the target uplink beam and the target downlink beam, and the terminal device is in the RRC idle state. state or RRC inactive state, the terminal device uses the target beam to perform data transmission with the network device according to the resource configuration information.
- the terminal equipment determines the target beam, so that by regulating the behavior of the terminal equipment, the uplink beam and/or the uplink beam used by the terminal equipment to use the preconfigured resources can be specified. or downlink beams, thereby avoiding the problem that the terminal equipment fails to perform data transmission due to inaccurate beams.
- the terminal equipment can transmit data through the resources corresponding to the pre-acquired resource configuration information, reducing the number of terminal equipment entering the RRC when transmitting data. The delay and signaling overhead caused by obtaining resource configuration information in the connected state.
- the resource configuration information is carried in one of an RRC connection release message, an RRC release message, an RRC connection recovery message, and an RRC recovery message.
- the resource configuration information is indicated by the network side, which can make the resource configuration more flexible, and on the other hand, the resource configuration information is carried in the existing signaling, which is more compatible with the existing technology.
- the terminal device may acquire resource configuration information through a random access procedure or in a connected state, so as to use the resource configuration information in an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state.
- determining the target beam by the terminal device includes: the terminal device receives first indication information from the network device; the first indication information is used to indicate the target uplink beam.
- the target uplink beam is indicated by the network device, which clarifies the uplink beam used by the terminal device when using the resource configuration information to transmit data with the network device.
- the selection of uplink beams is more flexible.
- the resource configuration information includes first indication information. In this way, on the one hand, signaling overhead can be saved, and on the other hand, the existing technology can be further compatible.
- the terminal device determines the target uplink beam according to the first preset rule. In a possible implementation manner, the terminal device determines the target uplink beam according to the first preset rule, including: the terminal device determines that the uplink beam used when the PUSCH is transmitted for the last time in the RRC connected state is the target uplink beam. In this way, the target uplink beam is determined by the terminal equipment, so that by regulating the behavior of the terminal equipment, the uplink beam used by the terminal equipment when using the resource configuration information and the network equipment for data transmission is clarified, so as to prevent the terminal equipment from determining that the uplink beam does not clear question.
- the terminal device receives second indication information from the network device; the second indication information is used to indicate the target downlink beam, and the terminal device determines the target downlink beam according to the second indication information.
- the target downlink beam is indicated by the network device, which clarifies the downlink beam used by the terminal device when using the resource configuration information to transmit data with the network device.
- the selection of downlink beams is more flexible.
- the resource configuration information includes second indication information.
- signaling overhead can be saved, and on the other hand, the existing technology can be further compatible.
- the terminal device determines the target downlink beam according to the second preset rule.
- the terminal device determines the target downlink beam according to the second preset rule, which includes: the terminal device determines the downlink beam corresponding to the control resource set where the last time of monitoring the physical downlink control channel PDCCH in the RRC connected state is located. is: the target downlink beam.
- the terminal device determines the downlink beam corresponding to the preset identified control resource set as the target downlink beam.
- the preset identified control resource set is the control resource set identified by 0. In this way, by determining the target downlink beam by the terminal device, the downlink beam used by the network device and the terminal device for data transmission can be specified, and the problem of unclear determination of the downlink beam by the network device and the terminal device can be avoided.
- the terminal device before the terminal device performs data transmission between the target beam and the network device according to the resource configuration information, it further includes at least one of the following: determining that the target beam is valid; determining that the timing advance TA is valid.
- the resource configuration information can be used when it is determined that the resource configuration information is valid, thereby improving the success rate of data transmission.
- the terminal device determines that the timing advance TA is valid when at least one of the following is satisfied: the timer for which the timing advance TA is valid is in a running state; since the previous timing advance TA is valid, the measured serving cell The RSRP increase of the reference signal received power is not greater than the first threshold; since the previous timing advance TA is valid, the measured reduction of the RSRP of the reference signal received power of the serving cell is not greater than the second threshold; the current location of the terminal equipment belongs to the preset Timing advance within the effective area of TA.
- timing advance TA is valid based on the effective area of the timing advance TA, when it is applied to systems such as high-altitude platforms, since the difference between the RSRPs of the central area and the border area of the cell is small,
- auxiliary information such as the first threshold value and the second threshold value
- the network device can increase the flexibility of network control and increase the accuracy of timing advance TA effective determination.
- the method further includes: the terminal device determines that the third indication information is not received within the first time period, and determines that the target uplink beam is valid; the third indication information is used to indicate the updated target uplink beam. That is to say, when no other update message for the target uplink beam is received, the current target uplink beam is the latest, and it can be regarded as valid.
- the flexibility of network device regulation is provided by the third instruction, which is convenient to implement, and on the other hand, the target uplink beam update process for updating the terminal device is clarified.
- the first time period may refer to the time from the time when the target uplink beam is determined to the current moment.
- the terminal device receives indication information for indicating the first time period from the network device.
- the first time period is predefined.
- the indication information for indicating the first time period is carried in one of a system message, a message of the RRC layer, a DCI and a MAC CE. In this way, the flexibility of the scheme can be improved.
- the terminal device determines that the target downlink beam is valid according to at least one of the following: the downlink beam determined by the terminal device according to the third preset rule is the same as the target downlink beam; The fourth indication information is not received within the period, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate the updated target downlink beam. If the downlink beam determined by the terminal device according to the third preset rule is the same as the target downlink beam, in a possible situation, it can be indicated that the current target downlink beam is still a beam with better quality, and the possibility of being updated is small. . The terminal device determines that the fourth indication information has not been received within the second time period, and in a possible implementation manner, when no other messages for the target downlink beam to be updated are received, it proves that the current target downlink beam is updated is up to date.
- the second time period may refer to the time from the time when the target downlink beam is determined to the current moment.
- the terminal device receives indication information for indicating the second time period from the network device; in another possible implementation manner, the second time period is predefined.
- the indication information for indicating the second time period is carried in one of a system message, a message of the RRC layer, a DCI and a MAC CE. In this way, the flexibility of the scheme can be improved.
- the downlink beam determined by the terminal device according to the third preset rule is the same as the target downlink beam, including: the terminal device is in an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state, and the terminal device receives the downlink beam sent by the network device. Reference signal; the terminal device measures the downlink reference signal to obtain the measurement result; the terminal device determines, according to the measurement result of the downlink reference signal, that the M beams with the best quality are the same as the M beams in the target downlink beam, and M is a positive integer.
- the target downlink beam includes M beams. In this way, it can be explained to a certain extent that the optimal downlink beams are still unchanged, so the probability of the target downlink beam being updated is small.
- the method before the terminal device receives the resource configuration information from the network device, the method further includes: the terminal device sends a first request to the network device, where the first request is used to request the resource configuration information.
- the network device can accurately know the requirements of the terminal device, so that the network device can better configure the resource configuration information for the terminal device (the information is more accurate), on the other hand, the terminal device actively triggers the network device to configure it. It avoids that the network device configures unnecessary resource configuration for the terminal device without knowing the needs of the terminal device, which makes the configuration more flexible and saves signaling overhead.
- the method before the terminal device receives the resource configuration information from the network device, the method further includes: the terminal device sends at least one of fifth indication information, sixth indication information and seventh indication information to the network device.
- the fifth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports data transmission in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state.
- the sixth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports sending the uplink reference signal in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state.
- the seventh indication information is used to indicate that the terminal equipment supports the downlink reference signal measurement in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state.
- at least one of the fifth indication information, the sixth indication information and the seventh indication information is carried in the first request.
- the network device can accurately know the requirements of the terminal device, so that the network device can better configure resource configuration information for the terminal device.
- the method before the terminal device and the network device perform data transmission, the method further includes: determining that at least one of the following conditions is satisfied:
- receiving the eighth indication information from the network device or, receiving at least one of the ninth indication information and the tenth indication information from the network device;
- the size of the current service data packet to be sent is not larger than the maximum supported transmission data block size corresponding to the terminal device.
- the eighth indication information is used to instruct the cell corresponding to the network device to support the terminal device to perform data transmission through preconfigured resources.
- the ninth indication information is used to indicate that: when the terminal device is connected to the 5G core network through the network device, the network device supports the terminal device to perform data transmission through preconfigured resources.
- the tenth indication information is used to indicate that: when the terminal device is connected to the EPC through the network device, the network device supports the terminal device to perform data transmission through preconfigured resources. In this way, on the one hand, the terminal device can be made clear about the capabilities of the network device. On the other hand, before data transmission, if it is judged that the service data packet to be sent meets the requirements, and then the data is transmitted according to the resource configuration information, the success rate of data transmission can be improved.
- At least one of the eighth indication information, the ninth indication information and the tenth indication information is carried in the system message. In this way, the existing technology can be more compatible.
- the method further includes: when the terminal device is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state, the terminal device sends the uplink reference signal to the network device according to the configuration information of the uplink reference signal. In this way, the network device can determine the target uplink beam based on the uplink reference signal, so as to update the target uplink beam.
- the method further includes: the terminal device receives the first message from the network device; the first message includes third indication information, resource At least one of the identification of the configuration information and the effective time of the third indication information.
- the first message is at least one of DCI, MAC CE and RRC messages.
- the method before the terminal device sends the uplink reference signal to the network device according to the configuration information of the uplink reference signal, the method further includes: the terminal device receives indication information from the network device that is used to indicate the configuration information of the uplink reference signal .
- the terminal device determines the configuration information of the uplink reference signal according to the fourth preset rule. In this way, the terminal device can determine the configuration information of the uplink reference signal according to various methods. For the configuration information of the uplink reference signal indicated by the network device, the selection of the configuration information is more flexible. For the terminal device to determine the configuration information of the uplink reference signal according to the preset rules, the signaling overhead indicated by the base station is saved, the implementation is simple, and the terminal is avoided. The behavior of the device in selecting the configuration information of the uplink reference signal is unclear.
- the resource configuration information includes indication information used to indicate the configuration information of the uplink reference signal.
- the terminal device determines the configuration information of the uplink reference signal according to the fourth preset rule, including: the terminal device determines that the configuration information of the uplink reference signal used when it is in the connected state is: configuration information.
- the signaling of the network device indicating the configuration information of the uplink reference signal can be omitted, and on the other hand, the configuration information of the uplink reference signal determined by this solution can improve the success rate of sending the uplink reference signal.
- the terminal device when the terminal device is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state, the terminal device measures the downlink reference signal sent by the network device according to the configuration information of the downlink reference signal, and obtains the measurement result; The network device sends indication information for indicating the measurement result; the terminal device receives the second message sent by the network device according to the resource configuration information; the second message includes fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate the updated target downlink beam.
- the network device can indicate the updated target downlink beam to the terminal device in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state, thereby improving the success rate of data transmission and reducing the energy consumption of the terminal device and the network device.
- the terminal device reports indication information for indicating the measurement result to the network device, including: the terminal device determines M candidate downlink beams according to the measurement result and the fifth preset rule; M is a positive integer ; The terminal device sends eleventh indication information to the network device, where the eleventh indication information is used to indicate M candidate downlink beams, and the updated target downlink beam is one of the M candidate downlink beams.
- M is not greater than N
- N is the number of candidate downlink beams to be reported by the terminal equipment configured by the network equipment.
- the flexibility of base station control can be provided to avoid the waste of resources caused by the UE reporting too many unnecessary candidate beams. sex.
- the fifth preset rule includes at least one of the following: candidate downlink beams in the M candidate downlink beams include: downlink beams whose signal quality in the measurement result is not less than the first threshold; Sort the K downlink beams from high to low, the M candidate downlink beams are the first M downlink beams in the K downlink beams, K is an integer greater than M, and the signal quality of each downlink beam in the K downlink beams is not less than first threshold.
- the base station instructs the first threshold to control the UE to report the candidate beams, so as to prevent the UE from reporting too many unnecessary candidate beams and waste resources. accuracy.
- the second message further includes: at least one of an identifier of the resource configuration information and an effective time of the fourth indication information.
- the terminal device can more easily determine the resource configuration information corresponding to the updated target downlink beam indicated by the network device.
- the terminal device when configured with multiple resource configuration information, it can be more easily distinguished.
- the second message includes the effective time of the fourth indication information, the controllability of the solution can be further improved.
- the second message is at least one of DCI, MAC CE and RRC messages.
- the existing technology can be more compatible.
- the method before the terminal device measures the downlink reference signal sent by the network device according to the configuration information of the downlink reference signal, the method further includes: the terminal device receives configuration information indicating the downlink reference signal from the network device instruction information. In another possible implementation manner, the terminal device determines the configuration information of the downlink reference signal according to the sixth preset rule, and determines the configuration information of the downlink reference signal.
- the resource configuration information includes indication information for indicating the configuration information of the downlink reference signal. In this way, the compatibility with the existing technology can be improved.
- the terminal device determines the configuration information of the downlink reference signal according to the sixth preset rule, including: determining that the configuration information of the downlink reference signal used by the terminal device in the connected state is: configuration information.
- the signaling of the network device indicating the configuration information of the downlink reference signal can be omitted, and on the other hand, the configuration information of the downlink reference signal determined by this solution can improve the success rate of sending the downlink reference signal.
- the resource configuration information includes: an identifier of the resource configuration information.
- the method further includes: the terminal device sends a confirmation message to the network device; and the confirmation message carries an identifier of the resource configuration information.
- the network device can be informed that the terminal device has successfully received the resource configuration information, so as to avoid data transmission failure using the resource configuration information due to inconsistent understanding of the use of the resource configuration information by the terminal device and the network device.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a data transmission method.
- a network device sends resource configuration information to a terminal device; the network device determines a target beam, and the target beam includes at least one of a target uplink beam and a target downlink beam; According to the resource configuration information, the network device uses the target beam to perform data transmission with the terminal device in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state.
- the terminal equipment determines the target beam, so that by regulating the behavior of the terminal equipment, the uplink beam and the / or downlink beam, which can avoid the problem that the terminal equipment fails to perform data transmission due to inaccurate beams.
- the terminal equipment can transmit data through the resources corresponding to the pre-acquired resource configuration information, reducing the number of terminal equipment entering the data when transmitting data. The delay and signaling overhead caused by the acquisition of resource configuration information in the RRC connected state.
- the resource configuration information is carried in one of an RRC connection release message, an RRC release message, an RRC connection recovery message, and an RRC recovery message.
- the resource configuration information is carried in the RRC connection release message.
- the terminal device may acquire resource configuration information through a random access process or in a connected state, so as to use the resource configuration information in an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state.
- the resource configuration information is indicated by the network side, which can make the resource configuration more flexible, and on the other hand, the resource configuration information is carried in the existing signaling, which is more compatible with the existing technology.
- the method further includes: the network device sends first indication information to the terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the target uplink beam.
- the target uplink beam is indicated by the network device, which clarifies the uplink beam used by the terminal device when using the resource configuration information to transmit data with the network device.
- the selection of uplink beams is more flexible.
- the resource configuration information includes first indication information. In this way, on the one hand, signaling overhead can be saved, and on the other hand, the existing technology can be further compatible.
- the network device determining the target beam includes: the network device determining the target uplink beam according to a first preset rule. In this way, the network device can designate target uplink beams for terminal devices in the RRC idle state and RRC disconnected state according to preset rules, thereby improving the success rate of data transmission and saving the power consumption of the terminal device and the network device.
- the network device determining the target beam includes: the network device determining that the uplink beam used when the PUSCH is transmitted for the last time in the RRC connected state is the target uplink beam. In this way, the target uplink beam is determined by the network device, so that uplink data can be received according to the information of the target uplink beam, so as to avoid the problem of unclear determination of the uplink beam by the terminal device.
- the method further includes: the network device sends second indication information to the terminal device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the target downlink beam.
- the target downlink beam is indicated by the network device, which clarifies the downlink beam used by the terminal device when using the resource configuration information to transmit data with the network device.
- the selection of downlink beams is more flexible.
- the resource configuration information includes second indication information.
- signaling overhead can be saved, and on the other hand, the existing technology can be further compatible.
- the network device determining the target beam includes: the network device determining the target downlink beam according to a second preset rule. In a possible implementation manner, the network device determines the target downlink beam according to the second preset rule, including: the network device determines the downlink beam corresponding to the control resource set where the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) opportunity is last monitored in the RRC connected state by the network device. is: the target downlink beam. In another possible implementation manner, the network device determines the downlink beam corresponding to the preset identified control resource set as the target downlink beam. In a possible implementation manner, the preset identified control resource set is the control resource set identified by 0.
- PDCCH physical downlink control channel
- the target downlink beam is determined by the network device, so that by regulating the behavior of the network device, the downlink beam used by the network device and the terminal device for data transmission can be clarified, which can prevent the network device and the terminal device from determining the downlink beam unclear.
- the method before the network device sends the resource configuration information to the terminal device, the method further includes: the network device receives a first request from the terminal device, where the first request is used to request resource configuration information.
- the network device can accurately know the requirements of the terminal device, so that the network device can better configure the resource configuration information for the terminal device (the information is more accurate), on the other hand, the terminal device actively triggers the network device to configure it. It avoids that the network device configures unnecessary resource configuration for the terminal device without knowing the needs of the terminal device, which makes the configuration more flexible and saves signaling overhead.
- the method before the network device sends the resource configuration information to the terminal device, the method further includes: the network device receiving at least one of fifth indication information, sixth indication information and seventh indication information from the terminal device.
- the fifth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports data transmission in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state.
- the sixth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports sending the uplink reference signal in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state.
- the seventh indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports the downlink reference signal measurement in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state.
- at least one of the fifth indication information, the sixth indication information and the seventh indication information is carried in the first request. In this way, the network device can accurately know the requirements of the terminal device, so that the network device can better configure resource configuration information for the terminal device.
- the method further includes: the network device sends the terminal device to the terminal device. Eighth indication information, where the eighth indication information is used to instruct the cell corresponding to the network device to support the terminal device to perform data transmission through preconfigured resources.
- the terminal device can be made to specify the capabilities of the network device, and when the capabilities of the network device match the needs of the terminal device itself, then perform data transmission with the network device according to the resource configuration information.
- the method before the network device uses the target beam to perform data transmission with the terminal device in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state according to the resource configuration information, the method further includes: the network device sends the terminal device to the terminal device.
- the ninth indication information and/or the tenth indication information is sent.
- the ninth indication information is used to indicate that when the terminal device is connected to the 5G core network through the network device, the network device supports the terminal device to perform data transmission through preconfigured resources.
- the tenth indication information is used to indicate that when the terminal device is connected to the evolved packet core network EPC through the network device, the network device supports the terminal device to perform data transmission through preconfigured resources.
- the terminal device can be made to specify the capabilities of the network device, and when the capabilities of the network device match the needs of the terminal device itself, data transmission with the network device can be performed according to the resource configuration information.
- At least one of the eighth indication information, the ninth indication information and the tenth indication information is carried in the system message. In this way, the existing technology can be more compatible.
- the method further includes: the network device receives an uplink reference signal from a terminal device in an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state; the network device determines an updated target uplink beam according to the uplink reference signal; the network The device sends a first message to the terminal device; the first message includes third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate the updated target uplink beam.
- the network device can indicate the updated target uplink beam to the terminal device in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state, thereby improving the success rate of data transmission and reducing the energy consumption of the terminal device and the network device.
- the first message further includes at least one of an identifier of the resource configuration information and an effective time of the third indication information.
- the terminal device can more easily determine the resource configuration information corresponding to the updated target uplink beam indicated by the network device. In this way, when the terminal device is configured with a variety of resource configuration information, can be more easily distinguished.
- the first message includes the effective time of the third indication information, the controllability of the solution can be further improved.
- the first message is at least one of DCI, MAC CE and RRC messages.
- the existing technology can be more compatible.
- the method before the network device receives the uplink reference signal from the terminal device in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state, the method further includes: sending the network device to the terminal device for indicating the configuration information of the uplink reference signal. Instructions.
- the resource configuration information includes indication information used to indicate the configuration information of the uplink reference signal. In this way, the existing technology can be more compatible.
- the method further includes: the network device determines the configuration information of the downlink reference signal, the network device sends the downlink reference signal to the terminal device according to the configuration information of the downlink reference signal, and the network device receives the information sent by the terminal device for the downlink reference signal.
- the indication information indicating the measurement result
- the network device determines the updated target downlink beam according to the indication information used to indicate the measurement result
- the network device sends a second message to the terminal device;
- the second message includes fourth indication information, the fourth indication
- the information is used to indicate the updated target downlink beam.
- the network device can indicate the updated target downlink beam to the terminal device in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state, thereby improving the success rate of data transmission and reducing the energy consumption of the terminal device and the network device.
- the second message further includes: at least one of an identifier of the resource configuration information and an effective time of the fourth indication information.
- the terminal device can more easily determine the resource configuration information corresponding to the updated target downlink beam indicated by the network device. In this way, when the terminal device is configured with a variety of resource configuration information, can be more easily distinguished.
- the second message includes the effective time of the fourth indication information, the controllability of the solution can be further improved.
- the second message is at least one of DCI, MAC CE and RRC messages.
- the method further includes: the network device sends the configuration information of the downlink reference signal to the terminal device.
- the network device sends the configuration information of the downlink reference signal to the terminal device.
- the selection of the configuration information is more flexible, and for the terminal device to determine the configuration information of the downlink reference signal according to the preset rules, the signaling overhead indicated by the base station is saved, the implementation is simple, and the terminal is avoided. The problem that the behavior of the device in selecting the configuration information of the downlink reference signal is unclear.
- the resource configuration information includes indication information for indicating the configuration information of the downlink reference signal.
- the resource configuration information includes: an identifier of the resource configuration information.
- the method further includes: the network device receives a confirmation message sent by the terminal device; and the confirmation message carries an identifier of the resource configuration information.
- the network device can be informed that the terminal device has successfully received the resource configuration information, so as to avoid data transmission failure using the resource configuration information due to inconsistent understanding of the use of the resource configuration information by the terminal device and the network device.
- a terminal device including a processor and a transceiver.
- a transceiver for receiving resource configuration information from a network device.
- the processor is configured to determine the target beam, and when the terminal device is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state, according to the resource configuration information, use the target beam to perform data transmission with the network device through the transceiver, and the target beam includes At least one of the target uplink beam and the target downlink beam.
- the resource configuration information is carried in one of an RRC connection release message, an RRC release message, an RRC connection recovery message and an RRC recovery message.
- the processor is specifically configured to: determine the target beam according to the first indication information received from the network device through the transceiver; the first indication information is used to indicate the target uplink beam.
- the resource configuration information includes first indication information.
- the processor is specifically configured to determine the target uplink beam according to the first preset rule.
- the processor is specifically configured to: determine the uplink beam used when the PUSCH is transmitted for the last time in the RRC connected state as the target uplink beam.
- the processor is specifically configured to: according to the second indication information received from the network device through the transceiver; the second indication information is used to indicate the target downlink beam.
- the processor is specifically configured to: determine the target downlink beam according to the second preset rule.
- the resource configuration information includes second indication information.
- the processor is specifically configured to: determine the downlink beam corresponding to the control resource set where the last time to monitor the physical downlink control channel PDCCH in the RRC connected state is: the target downlink beam.
- the processor is specifically configured to: determine the downlink beam corresponding to the preset identified control resource set as the target downlink beam.
- the processor before performing data transmission between the transceiver and the network device, is further configured to perform at least one of the following: determining that the target beam is valid; determining that the timing advance TA is valid.
- the processor is specifically configured to determine that the timing advance TA is valid when it is determined that at least one of the following is satisfied: the timer for which the timing advance TA is valid is in a running state; The RSRP increase of the obtained serving cell reference signal received power is not greater than the first threshold; since the previous timing advance TA is valid, the measured serving cell reference signal received power RSRP decrease is not greater than the second threshold; the current location of the terminal equipment It belongs to the preset timing advance TA effective area.
- the processor is further configured to: determine that the third indication information is not received through the transceiver within the first time period, and determine that the target uplink beam is valid; the third indication information is used to indicate the updated target uplink beam.
- the processor is specifically configured to determine that the target downlink beam is valid according to at least one of the following: the downlink beam determined according to the third preset rule is the same as the target downlink beam; The fourth indication information is not received through the transceiver, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate the updated target downlink beam.
- the transceiver is further configured to: receive the downlink reference signal sent by the network device; the processor is specifically configured to: measure the downlink reference signal to obtain a measurement result; the terminal device measures the downlink reference signal according to the measurement result; As a result, it is determined that the M beams with the best quality are the same as the M beams in the target downlink beam, where M is a positive integer.
- the transceiver is further configured to: send a first request to the network device, where the first request is used to request resource configuration information.
- the transceiver is further configured to: send at least one of fifth indication information, sixth indication information and seventh indication information to the network device; wherein the fifth indication information is used to indicate the terminal The equipment supports data transmission in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state; the sixth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal equipment supports sending uplink reference signals in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state; the seventh indication information is used to indicate that the terminal equipment supports The downlink reference signal is measured in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state.
- At least one of the fifth indication information, the sixth indication information and the seventh indication information is carried in the first request.
- the processor before the processor performs data transmission with the network device through the transceiver, the processor is further configured to determine that: receiving the eighth indication information from the network device through the transceiver; or, receiving through the transceiver from the network At least one of the ninth indication information and the tenth indication information of the device.
- the processor before the processor performs data transmission with the network device through the transceiver, it is further configured to determine that the size of the current service data packet to be sent is not greater than the maximum supported transmission data block size corresponding to the terminal device.
- the processor before the processor performs data transmission with the network device through the transceiver, it is further configured to determine that the size of the current service data packet to be sent is not greater than the maximum supported transmission data block size corresponding to the terminal device. Furthermore, before performing data transmission with the network device through the transceiver, it is determined that: receiving the eighth indication information from the network device through the transceiver.
- the processor before the processor performs data transmission with the network device through the transceiver, it is further configured to determine that the size of the current service data packet to be sent is not greater than the maximum supported transmission data block size corresponding to the terminal device. And before performing data transmission with the network device through the transceiver, it is determined that at least one of the ninth indication information and the tenth indication information from the network device is received through the transceiver.
- the eighth indication information is used to instruct the cell corresponding to the network device to support data transmission by the terminal device through preconfigured resources;
- the ninth indication information is used to instruct: when the terminal device is connected to the 5G core through the network device In the case of the network, the network device supports the terminal device to transmit data through preconfigured resources;
- the tenth indication information is used to indicate that: when the terminal device is connected to the evolved packet core network EPC through the network device, the network device supports the terminal device to pass Preconfigured resources for data transfer.
- the transceiver is further configured to send the uplink reference signal to the network device according to the configuration information of the uplink reference signal when the terminal device is in the radio access control RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state.
- the transceiver is further configured to: receive a first message from the network device; the first message includes at least one of the third indication information, the identifier of the resource configuration information, and the effective time of the third indication information an item.
- the processor is further configured to: receive, through the transceiver, the indication information used to indicate the configuration information of the uplink reference signal from the network device.
- the processor is further configured to: determine the configuration information of the uplink reference signal according to the fourth preset rule.
- the resource configuration information includes indication information used to indicate the configuration information of the uplink reference signal.
- the processor is specifically configured to: determine that the configuration information of the uplink reference signal used in the connected state is: the configuration information of the uplink reference signal.
- the processor is further configured to: when the terminal device is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state, measure the downlink reference signal sent by the network device according to the configuration information of the downlink reference signal, and obtain the measurement result; send indication information for indicating the measurement result to the network device through the transceiver; receive the second message sent by the network device through the transceiver according to the resource configuration information; the second message includes fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate The updated target downlink beam.
- the processor is further configured to: determine M candidate downlink beams according to the measurement result and the fifth preset rule; M is a positive integer; the transceiver is further configured to: send to the network device Eleventh indication information, where the eleventh indication information is used to indicate M candidate downlink beams, and the updated target downlink beam is one of the M candidate downlink beams.
- M is not greater than N
- N is the number of candidate downlink beams to be reported by the terminal equipment configured by the network equipment.
- the fifth preset rule includes at least one of the following: candidate downlink beams in the M candidate downlink beams include: downlink beams whose signal quality in the measurement result is not less than the first threshold; Sort the K downlink beams from high to low, the M candidate downlink beams are the first M downlink beams in the K downlink beams, K is an integer greater than M, and the signal quality of each downlink beam in the K downlink beams is not less than first threshold.
- the second message further includes: at least one of an identifier of the resource configuration information and an effective time of the fourth indication information.
- the processor is further configured to: determine the configuration information of the downlink reference signal according to the indication information received by the transceiver from the network device and used to indicate the configuration information of the downlink reference signal; or; According to the sixth preset rule, the configuration information of the downlink reference signal is determined, and the configuration information of the downlink reference signal is determined.
- the processor is specifically configured to: determine that the configuration information of the downlink reference signal used in the connected state is: the configuration information of the downlink reference signal.
- the resource configuration information includes: an identifier of the resource configuration information.
- a network device including a transceiver and a processor.
- the transceiver is used to send resource configuration information to the terminal device.
- the processor is configured to determine a target beam, where the target beam includes at least one of a target uplink beam and a target downlink beam; according to the resource configuration information, the target beam is used to communicate with the terminal equipment in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state of the radio access control.
- Transceiver for data transmission.
- the resource configuration information is carried in one of an RRC connection release message, an RRC release message, an RRC connection recovery message, and an RRC recovery message.
- the transceiver is further configured to: send one or both of the first indication information and the second indication information to the terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the target uplink beam, and the second indication information is used to indicate the target uplink beam.
- the indication information is used to indicate the target downlink beam.
- the resource configuration information includes one or both of the first indication information and the second indication information.
- the transceiver is further configured to: receive a first request from a terminal device, where the first request is used to request resource configuration information.
- the transceiver is further configured to: receive at least one of fifth indication information, sixth indication information and seventh indication information from the terminal device; wherein the fifth indication information is used to indicate The terminal equipment supports data transmission in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state; the sixth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal equipment supports sending uplink reference signals in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state; the seventh indication information is used to indicate that the terminal equipment supports The downlink reference signal is measured in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state.
- At least one of the fifth indication information, the sixth indication information and the seventh indication information is carried in the first request.
- the transceiver is further configured to: send eighth indication information to the terminal device, where the eighth indication information is used to instruct the cell corresponding to the network device to support the terminal device to perform data transmission through preconfigured resources.
- the transceiver is further configured to: send the ninth indication information and/or the tenth indication information to the terminal device.
- the ninth indication information is used to indicate that when the terminal device is connected to the 5G core network through the network device, the network device supports the terminal device to perform data transmission through preconfigured resources; In the case of connecting to the evolved packet core network EPC, the network device supports the terminal device to perform data transmission through preconfigured resources.
- the transceiver is further configured to: receive an uplink reference signal from a terminal device in an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state; and the processor is further configured to: determine, according to the uplink reference signal, the updated The first message is sent to the terminal device through the transceiver; the first message includes third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate the updated target uplink beam.
- the first message further includes at least one of an identifier of the resource configuration information and an effective time of the third indication information.
- the transceiver is further configured to: send indication information for indicating the configuration information of the uplink reference signal to the terminal device.
- the resource configuration information includes indication information used to indicate the configuration information of the uplink reference signal.
- the processor is further configured to: determine the configuration information of the downlink reference signal; send the downlink reference signal to the terminal device through the transceiver according to the configuration information of the downlink reference signal; The indication information is used to determine the updated target downlink beam; the transceiver is further configured to: receive indication information sent by the terminal device for indicating the measurement result; send a second message to the terminal device; the second message includes fourth indication information, The fourth indication information is used to indicate the updated target downlink beam.
- the second message further includes: at least one of an identifier of the resource configuration information and an effective time of the fourth indication information.
- the transceiver is further configured to: send indication information for indicating the configuration information of the downlink reference signal to the terminal device.
- the resource configuration information includes indication information for indicating the configuration information of the downlink reference signal.
- the resource configuration information includes: an identifier of the resource configuration information.
- the present application further provides a communication device.
- the communication apparatus may be any device on the sending end or device on the receiving end that performs data transmission in a wireless manner.
- a communication chip, a terminal device, or a network device such as a base station, etc.
- the device on the sending end and the device on the receiving end are relative.
- the communication device can be used as the above-mentioned network equipment or a communication chip that can be used for network equipment; in some communication processes, the communication device can be used as the above-mentioned terminal equipment or a communication chip that can be used for terminal equipment.
- a communication apparatus including a communication unit and a processing unit, so as to execute any one of the above-mentioned embodiments of the communication methods of the first aspect to the second aspect.
- the communication unit is used to perform functions related to transmission and reception.
- the communication unit includes a receiving unit and a sending unit.
- the communication device is a communication chip, and the communication unit may be an input/output circuit or port of the communication chip.
- the communication unit may be a transmitter and receiver, or the communication unit may be a transmitter and receiver.
- the communication apparatus further includes various modules that can be used to execute any one of the implementation manners of any one of the communication methods of the first aspect to the second aspect.
- a communication apparatus is provided, where the communication apparatus is the above-mentioned terminal device or network device. Includes processor and memory. Optionally, it also includes a transceiver, the memory is used to store a computer program or instruction, the processor is used to call and run the computer program or instruction from the memory, and when the processor executes the computer program or instruction in the memory, make the computer program or instruction in the memory.
- the communication apparatus executes any one of the implementations of any one of the communication methods of the first aspect to the second aspect.
- processors there are one or more processors and one or more memories.
- the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory may be provided separately from the processor.
- the transceiver may include a transmitter (transmitter) and a receiver (receiver).
- a communication apparatus including a processor.
- the processor coupled to the memory, is operable to perform the method of any one of the first to second aspects, and any one of possible implementations of the first to second aspects.
- the communication device further includes a memory.
- the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled to the communication interface.
- the communication apparatus is a terminal device.
- the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
- the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
- the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
- the communication apparatus is a network device.
- the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
- the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
- the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
- the communication device is a chip or a system of chips.
- the communication interface may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or a related circuit, etc. on the chip or a chip system.
- a processor may also be embodied as a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
- a system in an eighth aspect, includes the above-mentioned terminal device and network device.
- a computer program product includes: a computer program (also referred to as code, or instruction), when the computer program is executed, the computer executes any one of the above-mentioned first aspects.
- the method in the manner, or causing the computer to execute the method in any one of the implementation manners of the first aspect to the second aspect.
- a computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program (also referred to as code, or instruction) that, when it is run on a computer, causes the computer to execute any one of the above-mentioned first aspects
- the method in one possible implementation manner, or causing the computer to execute the method in any one of the implementation manners of the first aspect to the second aspect.
- a system-on-chip may include a processor.
- the processor coupled to the memory, is operable to perform the method of any one of the first to second aspects and any possible implementation of any of the first to second aspects.
- the chip system further includes a memory.
- Memory used to store computer programs (also called code, or instructions).
- a processor for invoking and running a computer program from a memory, so that a device on which the chip system is installed performs any one of the first to second aspects, and any one of the first to second aspects is possible method in the implementation.
- a twelfth aspect provides a processing device, comprising: an input circuit, an output circuit, and a processing circuit.
- the processing circuit is configured to receive the signal through the input circuit and transmit the signal through the output circuit, so that the method of any one of the first aspect to the second aspect, and any one of the possible implementations of the first aspect to the second aspect is implemented.
- the above-mentioned processing device may be a chip
- the input circuit may be an input pin
- the output circuit may be an output pin
- the processing circuit may be a transistor, a gate circuit, a flip-flop, and various logic circuits.
- the input signal received by the input circuit may be received and input by, for example, but not limited to, a receiver
- the signal output by the output circuit may be, for example, but not limited to, output to and transmitted by a transmitter
- the circuit can be the same circuit that acts as an input circuit and an output circuit at different times.
- the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific implementation manners of the processor and various circuits.
- FIG. 1a is a schematic diagram of a communication system architecture to which an embodiment of the application is applicable;
- FIG. 1b is a schematic diagram of another communication system architecture to which the embodiments of the present application are applicable;
- FIG. 1c is a schematic diagram of another communication system architecture to which the embodiments of the present application are applicable;
- FIG. 1d is a schematic diagram of another communication system architecture to which the embodiments of the present application are applicable;
- FIG. 1e is a schematic diagram of another communication system architecture to which the embodiment of the application is applicable;
- 2a is a schematic flowchart of a data transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- 2b is a schematic flowchart of another data transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- 2c is a schematic diagram of a timing advance TA effective area provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- 2d is a schematic flowchart of another data transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- 2e is a schematic flowchart of another data transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 2f is a schematic structural diagram of a signaling provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 1a exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of the architecture of a communication system to which the embodiments of the present application are applicable.
- the terminal device 130 can access the wireless network to obtain services of an external network (eg, the Internet) through the wireless network, or communicate with other devices through the wireless network, for example, can communicate with other terminal devices.
- the wireless network includes a radio access network (RAN) device 110 and a core network (core network, CN) device 120, wherein the RAN device 110 can be used to access the terminal device 130 to the wireless network, and the CN device 120 can use It is used to manage terminal equipment and provide a gateway for communication with the external network.
- RAN radio access network
- CN core network
- the number of each device in the communication system shown in FIG. 1a is only for illustration, and the embodiments of the present application are not limited thereto. In practical applications, the communication system may also include more terminal devices 130 and more RAN devices. 110, other devices may also be included.
- GSM Global System of Mobile Communication
- CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
- WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
- GPRS General Packet Radio Service
- LTE Long Term Evolution
- FDD Frequency Division Duplex
- TDD Time Division Duplex
- UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunication System
- WiMAX Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access
- the network architecture shown in FIG. 1a is also applicable to a public land mobile network (Public Land Mobile Network, PLMN) or a non-terrestrial network (Non-Terrestrial Network, NTN), and the NTN may include satellite communications. systems, high altitude platform station (HAPS) communication systems or other non-terrestrial communication systems.
- PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
- NTN Non-Terrestrial Network
- satellite communications systems, high altitude platform station (HAPS) communication systems or other non-terrestrial communication systems.
- HAPS high altitude platform station
- FIG. 1b is a schematic diagram of another network architecture to which the embodiment of the present application is applied.
- the network architecture includes CN equipment, RAN equipment and terminal equipment.
- the RAN equipment includes a baseband device and a radio frequency device, where the baseband device can be implemented by one node or multiple nodes, and the radio frequency device can be implemented independently from the baseband device, or integrated in the baseband device, or partially pulled
- the remote part is integrated in the baseband unit.
- a RAN device eNB
- a radio frequency device includes a baseband device and a radio frequency device, wherein the radio frequency device can be arranged remotely relative to the baseband device, for example, a remote radio unit (RRU) is arranged remotely relative to the BBU .
- RRU remote radio unit
- the control plane protocol layer structure may include a radio resource control (RRC) layer, a packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer. , radio link control (radio link control, RLC) layer, media access control (media access control, MAC) layer and physical layer and other protocol layer functions; user plane protocol layer structure can include PDCP layer, RLC layer, MAC layer
- RRC radio resource control
- RLC radio link control
- MAC media access control
- user plane protocol layer structure can include PDCP layer, RLC layer, MAC layer
- the functions of protocol layers such as physical layer and physical layer; in a possible implementation, a service data adaptation (service data adaptation protocol, SDAP) layer may also be included above the PDCP layer.
- SDAP service data adaptation protocol
- a RAN device may implement the functions of protocol layers such as RRC, PDCP, RLC, and MAC by one node, or may implement the functions of these protocol layers by multiple nodes.
- a RAN device may include a centralized unit (Centralized Unit, CU) and a distributed unit (Distributed Unit) DU, and multiple DUs may be centrally controlled by one CU.
- the CU and DU can be divided according to the protocol layers of the wireless network. For example, the functions of the PDCP layer and above are set in the CU, and the functions of the protocol layers below PDCP, such as the RLC layer and the MAC layer, are set in the DU.
- this protocol layer is only an example, and it can also be divided at other protocol layers, for example, at the RLC layer, the functions of the RLC layer and the above protocol layers are set in the CU, and the functions of the protocol layers below the RLC layer are set in the DU; Alternatively, in a certain protocol layer, for example, some functions of the RLC layer and functions of the protocol layers above the RLC layer are placed in the CU, and the remaining functions of the RLC layer and the functions of the protocol layers below the RLC layer are placed in the DU. In addition, it can also be divided in other ways, for example, by time delay, the functions whose processing time needs to meet the delay requirements are set in the DU, and the functions that do not need to meet the delay requirements are set in the CU.
- the radio frequency device may be remote, not placed in the DU, or integrated in the DU, or partially remote and partially integrated in the DU, which is not limited herein.
- FIG. 1c is a schematic diagram of yet another network architecture to which this embodiment of the present application is applicable.
- the control plane (CP) and user plane (UP) of the CU can also be separated and divided into different entities for implementation, namely the control plane (CP) CU entity (That is, the CU-CP entity) and the user plane (user plane, UP) CU entity (that is, the CU-UP entity).
- CP control plane
- UP user plane
- the signaling generated by the CU can be sent to the terminal device through the DU, or the signaling generated by the terminal device can be sent to the CU through the DU.
- the DU may directly encapsulate the signaling at the protocol layer and transparently transmit it to the terminal device or CU without parsing the signaling.
- the sending or receiving of the signaling by the DU includes this scenario.
- the signaling of the RRC or PDCP layer is finally processed as the signaling of the PHY layer and sent to the terminal device, or is converted from the received signaling of the PHY layer.
- the signaling of the RRC or PDCP layer can also be considered to be sent by the DU, or sent by the DU and radio frequency loading.
- the network architecture shown in Figure 1a, Figure 1b, or Figure 1c can be applied to various radio access technology (radio access technology, RAT) communication systems, such as LTE communication systems, or 5G (or referred to as 5G).
- the new wireless (new radio, NR) communication system can also be a transition system between the LTE communication system and the 5G communication system.
- the transition system can also be called a 4.5G communication system, and of course it can also be a future communication system.
- the network architecture and service scenarios described in the embodiments of the present application are for the purpose of illustrating the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application more clearly, and do not constitute limitations on the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application.
- the evolution of the network architecture and the emergence of new service scenarios, the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application are also applicable to similar technical problems.
- the apparatuses in the following embodiments of the present application may be located in terminal equipment or network equipment according to the functions implemented by them.
- the network device may be a CU node, a DU node, or a RAN device including a CU node and a DU node.
- the network architecture shown in FIG. 1a may be applicable to PLMN or may also be applicable to NTN, and NTN may include satellite communication system, high altitude platform station (HAPS) communication system or other non-terrestrial communication system.
- HAPS high altitude platform station
- scenario 1 The following describes two possible scenarios, which are called scenario 1 and scenario 2, by taking the example that the network architecture shown in FIG. 1a is applicable to a satellite communication system.
- FIG. 1d it is a schematic diagram of a network architecture of scenario 1 of the embodiment of the present application.
- the RAN device 110 is deployed on a satellite (such as a low-earth orbit satellite), and this scenario may also be referred to as a regenerative payload.
- a satellite such as a low-earth orbit satellite
- FIG. 1e it is a schematic diagram of a network architecture of scenario 2 of the embodiment of the present application.
- the RAN device 110 is deployed on the ground, and the terminal device 130 communicates with the RAN device 110 by using satellites to forward signals.
- the satellite is equivalent to a relay node or repeater.
- This scenario can also be called It is a transparent payload.
- Terminal devices include devices that provide voice and/or data connectivity to users, and may include, for example, handheld devices with wireless connectivity, or processing devices connected to a wireless modem.
- the terminal equipment may communicate with the core network via a radio access network (RAN), and exchange voice and/or data with the RAN.
- RAN radio access network
- the terminal equipment may include user equipment (UE), wireless terminal equipment, mobile terminal equipment, device-to-device (D2D) terminal equipment, V2X terminal equipment, machine-to-machine/machine-type communication ( machine-to-machine/machine-type communications, M2M/MTC) terminal equipment, Internet of things (IoT) terminal equipment, subscriber unit (subscriber unit), subscriber station (subscriber station), mobile station (mobile station) , remote station (remote station), access point (access point, AP), remote terminal (remote terminal), access terminal (access terminal), user terminal (user terminal), user agent (user agent), or user equipment (user device), etc.
- IoT Internet of things
- these may include mobile telephones (or "cellular" telephones), computers with mobile terminal equipment, portable, pocket-sized, hand-held, computer-embedded mobile devices, and the like.
- mobile telephones or "cellular" telephones
- PCS personal communication service
- SIP session initiation protocol
- WLL wireless local loop
- PDA personal digital assistant
- constrained devices such as devices with lower power consumption, or devices with limited storage capacity, or devices with limited computing power, etc.
- it includes information sensing devices such as barcodes, radio frequency identification (RFID), sensors, global positioning system (GPS), and laser scanners.
- RFID radio frequency identification
- GPS global positioning system
- a network device includes an access network (AN) device, such as a base station (eg, an access point), which may refer to a device in an access network that communicates with a wireless terminal device over an air interface through one or more cells.
- the base station can be used to convert the received Internet Protocol (Internet Protocol, IP) packets to each other and act as a router between the terminal device and the rest of the access network, where the rest of the access network can include an IP network.
- IP Internet Protocol
- the RSU can be a fixed infrastructure entity supporting V2X applications and can exchange messages with other entities supporting V2X applications.
- the network device can also coordinate the attribute management of the air interface.
- the network equipment may include an LTE system or an evolved base station (NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional Node B) in long term evolution-advanced (LTE-A), or may also include fifth generation mobile
- the next generation node B ( gNB ) in the new radio (NR) system of the communication technology (the 5th generation, 5G) may also include the cloud radio access network (Cloud RAN)
- a centralized unit (centralized unit, CU) and a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU) in the system are not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
- a higher carrier frequency for example, greater than or equal to 6GHz
- 6GHz the 5G communication system
- 28GHz, 38GHz, or 72GHz frequency band, etc. the 5G communication system
- beamforming (BF) technology will be used in the 5G communication system to obtain a beam with good directivity, so as to improve the antenna gain and increase the power in the transmitting direction.
- a beam mode can also be used to improve the spectral spatial multiplexing ratio.
- a beam is a communication resource, and a beam can be a wide beam, a narrow beam, or other types of beams.
- the technique of forming beams may be beamforming techniques or other technical means.
- the beamforming technology may specifically be a digital beamforming technology, an analog beamforming technology, a hybrid digital/analog beamforming technology, and the like. Different beams can be considered as different communication resources, and the same information or different information can be sent through different beams.
- Beams include transmit beams and receive beams. Transmit beams can refer to the distribution of signal strengths formed in different directions in space after signals are transmitted by antennas.
- Receive beams can refer to antenna arrays that strengthen or weaken wireless signals in different directions in space. Received distribution.
- the network device sends information through the transmit beam x1, and accordingly, the terminal device can receive the information through the receive beam x2.
- the transmit beam x1 and the receive beam x2 can be understood as one beam right. It should be noted that the embodiments of this application do not make a clear distinction between the transmit beam and the receive beam.
- the above transmit beam x1 and receive beam x2 may be collectively referred to as beam x, so it can be understood that the network device sends information through beam x, and accordingly , the terminal equipment can receive information through beam x.
- the beam can be represented by various signal identifiers in the protocol, such as the index of the synchronous signal/physical broadcast channel block (synchronous signal/physical broadcast channel block, SS/PBCH block, also referred to as SSB). That is, there is a correspondence between beams and SSBs.
- SS/PBCH block synchronous signal/physical broadcast channel block
- multiple beams with the same or similar communication characteristics may be regarded as one beam, and one beam may include one or more antenna ports for transmitting data channels, control channels, sounding signals, and the like.
- the transmitting beam may refer to the signal strength distribution formed in different spatial directions after the signal is transmitted by the antenna
- the receiving beam may refer to the signal strength distribution of the wireless signal received from the antenna in different spatial directions.
- one or more antenna ports that form a beam can also be regarded as an antenna port set
- the beam can also be called a spatial filer
- the transmit beam can also be called a spatial transmit filter
- the receive beam can also be called a spatial filer.
- Beams may also be referred to as spatial receive filters.
- the beam configuration information may include configuration information of uplink reference signals, configuration information of downlink reference signals, and the like.
- the beam configuration information may refer to resources used for beam management, and may also be embodied as resources used to calculate and measure beam quality.
- the beam quality includes layer 1 received reference signal power (layer 1 reference signal received power, L1-RSRP), layer 1 received reference signal quality (layer 1 reference signal received quality, L1-RSRQ), etc.
- the beam configuration information may include a synchronization signal (SS), a synchronization signal block (SSB), a broadcast channel (SS/PBCH block), a broadcast channel demodulation reference signal, a tracking reference Signal, downlink channel measurement reference signal, downlink control channel demodulation reference signal, downlink shared channel demodulation reference signal, uplink sounding reference signal, uplink random access signal, etc.
- the downlink reference signal may be a signal provided by the transmitter to the receiver for channel estimation or channel measurement, and occupies certain specific time-frequency resources. Channel measurement, channel estimation, downlink synchronization and assisting terminal equipment demodulation information can be performed according to these reference signals.
- These downlink reference signals usually have the following characteristics: usually pseudo-random sequences are used, which are discretely distributed in the time domain, which is equivalent to sampling the time-frequency domain characteristics of the channel. The denser the reference signal distribution, the more accurate the channel estimation, but the higher the overhead. large, affecting the system capacity.
- the downlink reference signal can be a demodulation reference signal DMRS (Demodulation Reference Signal), a phase noise tracking reference signal PT-RS (Phase Tracking Reference Signal), and a channel state information reference signal CSI-RS (Channel State Information Reference Signal), wherein, CSI -RS can be subdivided into: non-zero power CSI-RS (NZP-CSI-RS, Non-Zero Power CSI-RS), tracking reference signal Tracking RS, zero power CSI-RS (Zero Power CSI-RS) and channel Status information - interference measurement CSI-IM (CSI interference measurement), synchronization signal and PBCH block (SSB, synchronization signal and PBCH block).
- NZP-CSI-RS Non-Zero Power CSI-RS
- tracking reference signal Tracking RS zero power CSI-RS
- Zero Power CSI-RS Zero power CSI-RS
- channel Status information - interference measurement CSI-IM CSI interference measurement
- SSB synchronization signal and PBCH
- Different downlink reference signals may have different configuration information, and the configuration information of downlink reference signals (also referred to as downlink reference signal configuration) may include at least one of the following: reference signal measurement configuration and reference signal reporting configuration. in:
- the reference signal measurement configuration includes at least one of the following: reference signal type indication, reference signal sequence indication information (such as scrambling code ID), port number indication corresponding to the reference signal, pilot pattern indication, frequency domain characteristic indication information, time domain characteristic Indication information, where the reference signal type indication is used to indicate which downlink reference signal it is, the pilot pattern indication is used to indicate the pilot resource pattern, and the frequency domain characteristic indication information is used to indicate the distribution of the downlink reference signal in the frequency domain.
- reference signal type indication is used to indicate which downlink reference signal it is
- the pilot pattern indication is used to indicate the pilot resource pattern
- the frequency domain characteristic indication information is used to indicate the distribution of the downlink reference signal in the frequency domain.
- the time domain characteristic indication information is used to indicate the distribution of the downlink reference signal in the time domain, such as an indication of a transmission period and a time domain offset indication.
- the reference signal report configuration includes at least one of the following: a measurement report identifier, a carrier indicator, a report type indicator, and a report amount indicator.
- the uplink reference signal can be a sounding signal (SRS, Sounding Reference Signal), which is commonly referred to as an uplink Sounding signal.
- SRS is mainly used for uplink channel quality estimation, thereby being used for uplink scheduling, uplink timing advance, and uplink beam management.
- the configuration information of the uplink reference signal may include at least one of the following: a reference signal measurement configuration and a reference signal reporting configuration. in:
- the reference signal measurement configuration includes at least one of the following: reference signal type indication, reference signal sequence indication information (such as scrambling code ID), port number indication corresponding to the reference signal, pilot pattern indication, frequency domain characteristic indication information, time domain characteristic Indication information, where the reference signal type indication is used to indicate which uplink reference signal it is, the pilot pattern indication is used to indicate the pilot resource pattern, and the frequency domain characteristic indication information is used to indicate the distribution of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain.
- reference signal type indication is used to indicate which uplink reference signal it is
- the pilot pattern indication is used to indicate the pilot resource pattern
- the frequency domain characteristic indication information is used to indicate the distribution of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain.
- the time domain characteristic indication information is used to indicate the distribution of the uplink reference signal in the time domain, such as indicating the transmission period and the time domain offset indication.
- the reference signal report configuration includes at least one of the following: a measurement report identifier, a carrier indicator, a report type indicator, and a report amount indicator.
- a target beam is mentioned in the embodiments of the present application, and the target beam includes a target uplink beam and a target downlink beam.
- the indication information used to indicate the target uplink beam is called first indication information
- the indication information used to indicate the target downlink beam is called second indication information.
- target beam in the “target beam”, “target uplink beam” and “target downlink beam” in the embodiments of the present application is only for easier understanding of the content of this document, and for citing the names more clearly. Therefore, “target beam” can also be called “beam”, “target uplink beam” can also be called “uplink beam”, and target downlink beam can also be called “downlink beam”, and the word “target” has no other limiting meaning. , just to distinguish.
- the first indication information and the second indication information may also be collectively referred to as beam indication information. Or it can be said that the beam indication information includes the first indication information and/or the second indication information.
- the beam indication information may be used to indicate a beam used for transmission, including at least one of a transmit beam and a receive beam.
- the uplink beam in this embodiment of the present application may be referred to as a sending beam
- the downlink beam may be referred to as a receiving beam.
- the uplink beam in this embodiment of the present application may be referred to as a receive beam
- the downlink beam may be referred to as a transmit beam.
- the beam indication information may include the beam number, the beam configuration information number, the uplink signal resource number, the downlink signal resource number, the absolute index of the beam, the relative index of the beam, the logical index of the beam, the index of the antenna port corresponding to the beam, and the antenna corresponding to the beam.
- Port group index the index of the downlink signal corresponding to the beam, the time index of the downlink synchronization signal block corresponding to the beam, beam pair link (BPL) information, the transmission parameter (Tx parameter) corresponding to the beam, and the receiving parameter corresponding to the beam (Rx parameter), the transmit weight corresponding to the beam, the weight matrix corresponding to the beam, the weight vector corresponding to the beam, the receiving weight corresponding to the beam, the index of the transmit weight corresponding to the beam, the index of the weight matrix corresponding to the beam, the weight vector corresponding to the beam at least one of the index of the beam, the index of the receiving weight corresponding to the beam, the receiving codebook corresponding to the beam, the transmitting codebook corresponding to the beam, the index of the receiving codebook corresponding to the beam, the index of the transmitting codebook corresponding to the beam, the downlink signal Including synchronization signal, broadcast channel, broadcast signal demodulation signal, channel state information downlink signal (channel state information reference signal, CSI-RS), cell specific reference signal (cell
- the uplink signal includes any one of the intermediate and uplink random access sequence, the uplink sounding reference signal, the uplink control channel demodulation reference signal, the uplink data channel demodulation reference signal, and the uplink phase noise tracking signal.
- the network device may also allocate a QCL identifier to a beam having a QCL relationship among the beams associated with the frequency resource group.
- the beam indication information can also be embodied as a transmission configuration index (TCI), and the TCI can include various parameters, such as cell number, bandwidth part number, reference signal identifier, synchronization signal block identifier, QCL type, etc.
- TCI transmission configuration index
- the working state of the terminal device may include a radio resource control (RRC) idle (RRC_IDLE) state, an RRC inactive (Inactive) state, and an RRC connected (RRC_CONNECTED) state.
- RRC radio resource control
- the RRC idle state may be referred to as idle state for short
- the RRC inactive state may be referred to as inactive state for short
- the RRC connected state may be referred to as connected state for short.
- the three working states are described below.
- the network device can store the device parameters of the terminal device. If the terminal device has not communicated with the network device for a long time, the network device will store the device parameters of the terminal device. If the parameter is deleted, the state of the terminal device at this time is the idle state. When in the idle state, the terminal device does not have an RRC connection, and can perform cell selection and reselection, monitor the paging channel, and track area update (TAU). If the terminal device in the idle state needs to communicate with the network device, it needs to initiate the random access procedure again.
- TAU track area update
- the network device can store the device parameters of the terminal device. During this period, the terminal device can communicate with the network device. The state of the terminal device at this time is is connected. When in the connected state, the terminal device can send and receive data, and according to the activity of the terminal device, discontinuous reception (DRX) can be used to save air interface resources and the power of the terminal device.
- DRX discontinuous reception
- Inactive state The terminal device in the inactive state disconnects the RRC connection from the network device, and does not need to continuously monitor downlink data, so as to achieve the same power saving effect as in the idle state, but the terminal device and the network device in the inactive state are both
- the context information of the terminal device is stored, and when the terminal device needs to enter the connected state, the network device can configure the terminal device in the inactive state to enter the connected state based on the stored context information.
- system and “network” in the embodiments of the present application may be used interchangeably.
- At least one means one or more, and “plurality” means two or more.
- And/or which describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicates that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can indicate: the existence of A alone, the existence of A and B at the same time, and the existence of B alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
- the character “/” generally indicates that the associated objects are an “or” relationship.
- At least one item(s) below” or similar expressions thereof refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single item(s) or plural items(s).
- At least one item (a) of a, b, or c can represent: a, b, c, a-b, a-c, b-c, or a-b-c, where a, b, c can be single or multiple .
- ordinal numbers such as “first” and “second” mentioned in the embodiments of the present application are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the order, sequence, priority or importance of multiple objects degree.
- the first indication information, the second indication information, etc. are only for distinguishing different indication information, but do not indicate the difference in priority or importance of the two indication information.
- FIG. 2a exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a data transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 2a, the method includes:
- Step 201 the network device sends resource configuration information to the terminal device.
- the terminal device receives resource configuration information from the network device.
- the resource configuration information in this embodiment of the present application is used to indicate that the terminal device can perform data transmission through the resource configuration information when it is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state.
- the resource configuration information is pre-configured by the network device for the terminal device, so it may be referred to as "pre-configured" resource configuration information, or may also be referred to as the resource configured by the resource configuration information.
- the resource configuration information optionally, the resource configuration information is configured by the network device for the terminal device when the terminal device is in the RRC connection state, specifically, the network device can send the resource configuration to the terminal device through an RRC message, MAC CE or DCI. information.
- the resources configured by the resource configuration information may include at least one of time domain resources, frequency domain resources, code domain resources, and air domain resources, and the resources configured by the resource configuration information include uplink resources and/or downlink resources.
- the resource configuration information may include: PUSCH configuration information, PUCCH configuration information, PDCCH configuration information, and a radio network temporary identifier (Radio Network Temporary Identifier, RNTI) of the terminal device (for example, it may be pur-RNTI). ), the configuration information of the uplink reference signal, the configuration information of the downlink reference signal, one or more of the resource implicit release indication and the resource usage times indication.
- RNTI Radio Network Temporary Identifier
- the PUSCH configuration information is used to indicate the resource configuration information used when the terminal device sends uplink data
- the PUSCH configuration information may include at least one of the following: reference time domain location indication, time domain allocation information, frequency domain allocation information, antenna port information, Sounding reference signal resource indication, transport block size indication information, repetition type indication information, repetition times indication, and power control parameter information. in:
- Reference time domain position indication information used to indicate the starting position of the PUSCH resource in the time domain.
- the reference time domain location indication information may be indicated by an absolute value.
- the absolute value indication may be the reference system frame number (SFN, System Frame Number), which is equivalent to the start of the PUSCH resource in the time domain at the reference SFN.
- the UE determines the start of the PUSCH resource in the time domain through the reference SFN. position; or the reference time domain position indication information can be indicated by relative position and offset, for example, the base station can indicate a reference point position (e.g.
- the UE receives Two indications, the starting position of the PUSCH in the time domain is determined according to the reference point position and the offset indication information. In a possible design, the UE determines the PUSCH in the time domain according to the sum of the reference point position and the offset indication information. starting point;
- Time domain allocation information indicates the allocation information of PUSCH resources in the time domain; optionally, this allocation information includes at least one of the following: the starting position of the PUSCH resources in the time domain, the length occupied by the PUSCH resources in the time domain (in the time domain) at least one of the duration);
- Frequency domain allocation information indicates the allocation information of PUSCH resources in the frequency domain, or the distribution information of PUSCH resources in the frequency domain; optionally, this allocation information includes at least one of the following: frequency domain starting position information, timing of each PUSCH The number of occupied PRBs, the interval between adjacent PUSCH occasions; frequency hopping indication information; wherein, PUSCH occasion, PUSCH occasion refers to the PUSCH resource location that can be used to send uplink information, and PUSCH occasion may also be called PUSCH opportunity;
- Antenna port information indicates the number of antenna ports used for this PUSCH configuration information
- Sounding reference signal resource indication indicates the resource information used by the sounding reference signal
- Transport block size indication indicates the corresponding transport block size when using PUSCH resource transmission
- Repetition type indication information instructs the terminal device to perform repeated transmission.
- the repetition type may include at least one of repeated transmission between time slots and repeated transmission within time slots; it is understood that repeated transmission between time slots may be performed through multiple consecutive Slots are repeated, or repeated by multiple discontinuous time slots; optionally, if discontinuous time slots are repeated, the network device may further indicate the interval between two discontinuous time slots; Intra-slot repetition is repeated multiple times in the same time slot, and the multiple repetitions may be repeated by consecutive multiple symbols, or may be repeated by discontinuous multiple symbols, optionally, if If multiple discontinuous symbols are repeated, the network device may further indicate the interval between two discontinuous symbols;
- Repetition times indication information the repetition times corresponding to the repeated transmission.
- the network device may indicate the starting position of the first repetition. For example, if the repetition type indication information indicates repeated transmission between time slots, the network device may indicate the first repetition. The time slot information where the repeated transmission is located; if the repetition type indication information indicates repetition within a time slot, it can indicate the time slot information where the first repeated transmission is located, and the location information of the first repeated transmission located in the time slot, For example, the network device may indicate the information of the time slot in which the first repeated transmission is located, and which symbol in this time slot is located in the first repeated transmission.
- Power control parameter information parameters indicating power control on this PUSCH
- Resource Implicit Release Indication Instructs the terminal equipment to determine to release PUSCH resources; this release indication can be a number of times indication or a timer indication, if the release indication is a number of times indication, such as the number of indications N, when the terminal equipment is in the available PUSCH for N consecutive times No data is sent on the resource, that is, the PUSCH resource is not used for N consecutive data transmission with the network device, and the terminal device can release the resource configuration information.
- the network device can implicitly release the resource configuration information configured for the terminal device; similarly, if the number of release indications is a timer indication, such as indicating timer T, when the terminal device runs on timer T If the resource configuration information and the network device are not used for data transmission within the time period, the terminal device can release the resource configuration information. Correspondingly, if the network device does not use the resource configuration information and the terminal within the running time of the T timer T The device performs data transmission, and the network device can release the resource configuration information.
- a timer indication such as indicating timer T
- Resource usage times indication Indicates the number of times that the terminal device can use the resource configuration information to perform data transmission with the network device. For example, if the usage times indicator is 1, the terminal device can only use the resource configuration information to perform data transmission with the network device once. Similarly, if the number of times of use is 2, the terminal device can use the resource configuration information to perform data transmission with the network device twice; Trigger the random access procedure.
- PDCCH configuration information used to instruct the terminal device to monitor the resource configuration information used when the network device sends control information, including at least one of the following: search space (search space) configuration and control resource set (control resource set, CORESET), search There may be an association relationship between the space and the CORESET), wherein the search space and the CORESET associated with the search space may be used to indicate multiple candidate time-frequency positions corresponding to the DCI, the wireless network temporary identifier, the listening time window size, and the start of the listening time window. location, where:
- the control resource set determines the frequency domain resources for transmitting DCI, that is, DCI can be transmitted on the frequency domain resources corresponding to the control resource set, and the frequency domain resources corresponding to the control resource set can include multiple resource blocks (RB, Resource Block).
- RB Resource Block
- the search space determines the time domain resources for transmitting DCI, and the search space can be configured with some time domain information, such as: period (that is, the time interval for detecting the search space, the unit can be a time slot); time slot offset (that is, the detection period starts to The time slot offset between the search spaces is actually detected, and the time slot offset is less than the value of the detection period); the first duration (configured through the duration parameter, that is, the time for continuously detecting the search space, can include multiple time slot, and the number of included time slots is less than the value of the detection period); the time domain start position (that is, in each time slot, the time domain start position corresponding to the control resource set associated with the search space).
- period that is, the time interval for detecting the search space, the unit can be a time slot
- time slot offset that is, the detection period starts to The time slot offset between the search spaces is actually detected, and the time slot offset is less than the value of the detection period
- the first duration configured through the duration parameter, that is, the time for continuously
- Wireless network temporary identifier used for the RNTI used by the terminal equipment when monitoring the PDCCH, such as pur-RNTI; in other words, the wireless network temporary identifier is used for the terminal equipment.
- Monitoring time window size used to indicate how long the terminal device monitors the PDCCH, optionally, the monitoring time window can be embodied in the form of a timer;
- Start position of listening time window used by the terminal device to determine the starting position of the listening time window. For example, if the network device indicates that the starting position of the listening time window is 3 time slots, after the terminal sends data on the PUSCH resource, The listening time window is started after 3 time slots, and the numerical value indicating the starting position of the time window and the time unit corresponding to the numerical value are not limited in the present invention.
- the PUCCH configuration information includes at least one of the following: time domain resource allocation information, frequency domain resource allocation information, PUCCH format information, power control information, and HARQ feedback timing information indication.
- time domain resource allocation information indicates allocation information of PUCCH resources in the time domain; optionally, this allocation information includes at least one of the following: a start symbol where the time domain resources are located, the length occupied by the time domain resources in the time domain (in the duration of the time domain);
- Frequency domain allocation information indicates the allocation information of the PUCCH resources in the frequency domain, or the distribution information of the PUCCH resources in the frequency domain; optionally, the allocation information includes at least one of the following: starting position information of the PUCCH resources in the frequency domain, The number of resources occupied by the PUCCH in the frequency domain (such as the number of PRBs);
- Power control information indicates the parameters used for power control according to PUCCH
- HARQ feedback timing information indication indicates the moment when the terminal device sends the HARQ feedback information to the network device. In other words, after the terminal device receives the data carried on the PUSCH sent by the network device, it can determine how long it takes according to this information indication Feedback HARQ feedback information to the network device.
- this HARQ feedback information can be sent through PUSCH or PUCCH.
- the terminal device may send uplink data according to the PUSCH configuration information in the resource configuration information, and then receive scheduling information according to the configured wireless network temporary identifier (e.g. pur-RNTI) and PDCCH configuration information, wherein , the scheduling information may include at least one of the following: time domain resource indication, frequency domain resource indication, modulation and coding method, new data indication information (through this indication, it can be determined whether it is new transmission or retransmission), power control command indication, redundancy version indication, DCI format indication, carrier indication information, BWP indication information, physical resource block (Physical Resource block) bundling size, rate matching indicator (Rate matching indicator) information, HARQ process number indication, PUCCH resource indication information, PDSCH and HARQ Timing indication information, antenna port indication, Transmission configuration indication (TCI, Transmission configuration indication), transmission mode indication (including unicast, multicast or broadcast), target uplink beam indication information, and target downlink beam indication information between feedbacks.
- the scheduling information may include at least one of the following: time domain resource indication
- the scheduling information may be received by monitoring the PDCCH.
- the terminal device starts the monitoring time window (this time window can appear in the form of a timer) after a period of time after sending the uplink data (e.g. the terminal device can determine the duration according to the starting position of the monitoring time window), and then The PDCCH is monitored using the configured wireless network temporary identity.
- the period of time may be X time units, and X may be a positive integer.
- one time unit may be Y symbol, Y time slot, Y subframe, Y millisecond, Y microsecond, or a unit of other time granularity Y may be a positive integer.
- X may be predefined by a protocol, and may be configured by the network device for the terminal device.
- the terminal device in the connected state may receive the resource configuration information sent by the network device.
- the terminal device may receive the resource configuration information sent by the network device during the random access process.
- the resource configuration information is carried in an RRC message.
- the resource configuration information is carried in one of an RRC connection release message, an RRC release message, an RRC connection recovery message, and an RRC recovery message.
- the resource configuration information is carried in the RRC connection release message.
- the RRC connection release message can be written as RRC Release in English.
- the resource configuration information may further include: an identifier of the resource configuration information.
- the terminal device sends a confirmation message to the network device; the confirmation message carries the identifier of the resource configuration information, thereby indicating to the network device that the terminal device has successfully received the resource configuration corresponding to the identifier information.
- the terminal device can request different resource configuration information for different types of services. There is a correspondence between the network device configuration resource configuration information and the service type.
- the resource configuration information to be used can be determined according to the corresponding relationship and the service type corresponding to the service to be sent, and then the service data is sent to the network device according to the resource configuration information; optionally, the resource configuration information and the service type
- the corresponding relationship between them may be the corresponding relationship between the resource configuration identifier and the service identifier.
- the corresponding relationship may be one-to-one, one-to-many, many-to-many, and many-to-one; this is not limited in this invention.
- the word “bearer” may also be replaced with “include” and “carry”, which is usually expressed by “include” in English.
- the confirmation message carries resource configuration information
- the confirmation message includes resource configuration information
- the confirmation message carries resource configuration information
- Step 202 the terminal device determines a target beam, and the target beam includes at least one of a target uplink beam and a target downlink beam.
- the terminal device can determine the target uplink beam in various ways, for example, it can be determined by the first indication information in the following way a1, for example, it can be determined by the first indication in the following way a2. determined by a preset rule.
- the terminal device receives the first indication information from the network device, and determines the target uplink beam according to the first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the target uplink beam.
- the network device may send the first indication information and the resource configuration information to the terminal device through two messages respectively. Or, in another possible implementation manner, the network device may send the first indication information and the resource configuration information in one message.
- the resource configuration information includes the first indication information.
- the terminal device receives the resource configuration information, the first indication information can also be obtained.
- the terminal device determines the target uplink beam according to the first indication information.
- the first indication information is an uplink beam index (UL beam index).
- UL beam index uplink beam index
- the terminal device uses the uplink beam index and the pre-acquired uplink beam index and the corresponding relationship between the uplink beam
- the target uplink beam is determined, where the corresponding relationship may be preset in a protocol or configured by a network device, for example, the network device configures the corresponding relationship through a system message or an RRC message.
- the first indication information is carried in a control resource set (Control resource set, CORESET).
- the terminal device determines the target uplink beam according to the first preset rule.
- mode a2 in a possible implementation mode, when the resource configuration information may not include the first indication information, the terminal device adopts the mode a2; otherwise, when the resource configuration information includes the first indication information, the terminal device adopts the mode a1, in other words, the use of mode a1 is preferred to mode a2.
- the terminal device may use the uplink beam used by itself to transmit the PUSCH for the last time in the RRC connected state as the target uplink beam.
- the terminal device may be in the RRC connected state last time (the previous time in the RRC connected state refers to the situation in which the last time it was in the RRC connected state starting from the current moment)
- the uplink beam used at the time is used as the target uplink beam, so that when the terminal device sends uplink data to the network device through the resources configured by the resource configuration information, the target uplink beam is used.
- the target uplink beam determined by the terminal device according to the first indication information or the first preset rule may be one beam or multiple beams, and the specific number is not limited in the present invention.
- the terminal device can determine the target downlink beam in a variety of ways, for example, it can be determined by the second indication information in the following method b1. It can be determined by the second preset rule in the following manner b2.
- Mode b1 the terminal device receives the second indication information from the network device, and the terminal device determines the target downlink beam according to the second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the target downlink beam.
- the terminal device may receive the second indication information from the network device.
- the terminal device may receive the second indication information and resource configuration information from the network device through two messages respectively.
- the terminal device may receive the second indication information and the resource configuration information in one message, and optionally, the resource configuration information may include the second indication information.
- the resource configuration information includes the second indication information, so that the terminal device can also obtain the second indication information when receiving the resource configuration information.
- the terminal device determines the target downlink beam according to the second indication information.
- the second indication information is a downlink beam index (DL beam index).
- the target downlink beam is determined, wherein the corresponding relationship may be preset by a protocol or configured by a network device.
- the network device configures the corresponding relationship through a system message or an RRC message.
- the second indication information is carried in a control resource set (Control resource set, CORESET).
- the terminal device determines the target downlink beam according to the second preset rule.
- the terminal device adopts the mode b2; otherwise, when the resource configuration information includes the second indication information, the terminal device adopts the mode b1, in other words, the use of mode b1 is preferred over mode b2.
- the terminal device can use the downlink beam used when it was in the RRC connected state last time (the last time it was in the RRC connected state refers to the last time it was in the RRC connected state starting from the current moment) as the target downlink beam, so that The downlink data sent by the network device through the resource configured by the resource configuration information is received based on the target downlink beam.
- the terminal device determines that the target downlink beam is: the downlink beam corresponding to the control resource set CORESET where the terminal device in the RRC connection state monitors the physical downlink control channel (Physical Downlink Control Channel, PDCCH) opportunity (occasion) for the last time.
- PDCCH Physical Downlink Control Channel
- the downlink beam corresponding to the control resource set where the terminal device determines the last time to monitor the PDCCH in the RRC connected state is: the target downlink beam.
- Example 3 The terminal device determines the downlink beam corresponding to the preset identified control resource set as the target downlink beam.
- the control resource set with the preset identifier is the control resource set with the identifier 0. It can also be said that in this possible implementation manner, the target downlink beam includes the beam corresponding to CORESET#0.
- the target downlink beam determined by the terminal device according to the second indication information or the second preset rule may be one beam or multiple beams, and the specific number is not limited in the present invention.
- the network device determines a target beam, and the target beam includes a target uplink beam and/or a target downlink beam.
- the network device may determine the target uplink beam by means of beam training.
- the network device may determine the target uplink beam according to the first preset rule.
- the network device may use the uplink beam used by the terminal device when the terminal device transmits the PUSCH for the last time in the RRC connected state as the target uplink beam.
- the network device may be in the RRC connected state last time (the previous time in the RRC connected state refers to the situation in which the last time it was in the RRC connected state starting from the current moment)
- the uplink beam used at the time is used as the target uplink beam, so as to receive uplink data sent by the terminal device to the network device through the resources configured by the resource configuration information according to the target uplink beam.
- the target uplink beam determined by the network device may be one beam or multiple beams, and the specific number is not limited in the present invention.
- the network device may determine the target beam by means of beam training.
- the network device may determine the target downlink beam according to the second preset rule.
- the network device may set the time when the network device was in the RRC connected state last time (the previous time in the RRC connected state refers to the last time it was in the RRC connected state starting from the current moment).
- the used downlink beam is used as the target downlink beam, so as to send downlink data to the terminal device based on the target downlink beam.
- the target downlink beam includes: the control where the terminal equipment in the RRC connection state monitors the physical downlink control channel (Physical Downlink Control Channel, PDCCH) opportunity (occasion) for the last time.
- PDCCH Physical Downlink Control Channel
- the network device determines the downlink beam corresponding to the control resource set where the last PDCCH monitoring opportunity in the RRC connected state is located as the target downlink beam.
- the terminal device determines the downlink beam corresponding to the preset identified control resource set as the target downlink beam.
- the control resource set with the preset identifier is the control resource set with the identifier 0. It can also be said that in this possible implementation manner, the target downlink beam includes: the beam corresponding to CORESET#0.
- the network device may determine the target downlink beam according to the result reported by the terminal device (for example, the reported result may be the candidate downlink beam selected by the terminal device).
- An algorithm or rule is used to determine the target downlink beam.
- the network device may select the downlink beam with the best signal quality from the candidate beams reported by the terminal device as the target downlink beam.
- the target downlink beam determined by the network device may be one beam or multiple beams, and the specific number is not limited in the present invention.
- Step 203 the terminal device is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state, and uses the target beam to perform data transmission with the network device according to the resource configuration information.
- the network device may use the target beam to perform data transmission with the terminal device in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state according to the resource configuration information.
- the terminal equipment does not determine the target uplink beam and the target downlink beam in the process of data transmission through the uplink resources configured by the resource configuration information, the terminal equipment does not know what to expect. On which beam the PUSCH is sent, and it is also unknown on which beam the PDSCH should be received. In this way, data transmission between the terminal device and the network device may not be performed based on the mechanism of the resources configured by the resource configuration information, or the energy consumption between the terminal device and the network device is relatively large.
- the terminal device For example, if the terminal device does not determine the target uplink beam, the terminal device needs to send the same data on different uplink beams, and the network device needs to time-division blind detection in different beam directions. It increases the energy consumption of terminal equipment and network equipment. For another example, if the terminal device does not determine the target downlink beam, the network device needs to send the same data on different downlink beams, and the terminal device needs to monitor on different beams. Energy consumption of equipment and network equipment. In this application, the terminal equipment can determine the target beam, and then perform data transmission based on the target beam. In this way, compared with the aforementioned scheme in which the target uplink beam and the target downlink beam are not determined, the capacity of the terminal equipment and the network equipment can be reduced. consumption.
- the terminal device may save it, and the validity period of the resource configuration information may be implemented in various ways, for example, Before entering the connection state next time, when there is data to be transmitted, the resource configuration information can be used for data transmission. That is to say, after the terminal device in the RRC connected state acquires the resource configuration information, the resource configuration information becomes invalid when it enters the RRC connected state next time.
- the network device may reconfigure the resource configuration information for the terminal device when the terminal device enters the RRC connected state next time.
- the resource configuration information configured by the network device for the terminal device twice may be the same or different.
- the operation of saving the configuration by the terminal device may be predefined by the protocol, or the network device may instruct the terminal device to save the configuration.
- the network device may instruct the terminal device to save the configuration when instructing the terminal device to enter the RRC idle state, in other words not to release the resource configuration information acquired in the connected state; similarly, the network device may instruct the terminal device When accessing the RRC inactive state, instruct the terminal device to save this configuration.
- the terminal device may enter the RRC connected state one or more times. For example, after the terminal device obtains the resource configuration information in the RRC connected state once, the resource configuration information does not become invalid when it enters the RRC connected state next time, and the network device may not allocate the resource configuration information to the terminal device in the current RRC connected state. In this way, the number of times of allocating resource configuration information to the terminal equipment can be reduced, thereby reducing signaling consumption.
- the number of times that the terminal device can enter the RRC connected state may be preset or determined by the terminal device itself. For example, when the terminal device transmits data according to a resource configuration information, and fails to retransmit multiple times, it can determine that the resource configuration information is invalid, and re-request to obtain the resource configuration information when entering the RRC connection state next time.
- FIG. 2 b exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of another data transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 2 b , the method adds step 211 before step 201 on the basis of the above-mentioned FIG. 2 a :
- Step 211 the terminal device sends a first request to the network device.
- the first request is used to request resource configuration information.
- the first request may also be referred to as a pre-configured resource request, which may be written as a pre-configured resource Configuration request in English.
- the process in which the terminal device is in the RRC idle state or in the RRC inactive state and can perform data transmission with the network device may be referred to as the first process, or referred to as the first process, or the process of passing data through the network device.
- the process of preconfiguring resources for data transmission, etc. may also have other names. For convenience of subsequent reference, this application calls it the first process.
- a "trigger condition” may be set, and the “trigger condition” may also be referred to as the first condition and other names.
- the name is temporarily called “trigger condition”. It has no other limiting meaning.
- the terminal device determines that the first process is triggered, and when the terminal device needs to use the first process (ie, transmits data between the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state and the network device through the configured resources), the first process can be started. It can also be said that before the terminal device triggers the first process (or before the terminal device can use the first process to transmit data between the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state and the network device), the triggering condition needs to be satisfied.
- the terminal device may send a first request to the network device.
- the terminal device in addition to the trigger condition mentioned, there may also be other conditions.
- the trigger condition and other conditions for example, the terminal device is in the connected state
- the terminal device sends the first a request.
- the terminal device sends the first request to the network device when at least the trigger condition is satisfied.
- the trigger conditions mentioned in the above content may include the following condition 1 or the following condition 2.
- the trigger conditions mentioned in the above content may include condition 1 and condition 2.
- Condition 1 includes: the terminal device determines that the size (size) of the current service data packet to be sent is not larger than the data packet size threshold corresponding to the type of the terminal device.
- a possible English writing manner of condition 1 includes: "the size of the resulting MAC PDU including the total UL data size of the traffic is smaller than or equeal to the maximum supported TBS based on the UE category.”
- the size of the data packet may also be referred to as the size of the data packet.
- the size of the data packet can be written as size in English.
- the terminal device determines that the size (size) of the current service data packet to be sent is not greater than the maximum supported transport data block size (TBS) corresponding to the terminal device .
- TBS maximum supported transport data block size
- the packet size threshold can be TBS.
- the size of the uplink data packet of the service is 10 bytes, assuming that the service data packet is processed by each layer (adding the header of each layer, the MAC layer multiplexing operation, etc.)
- the corresponding size (size) of the MAC PDU is: 20 bytes.
- the maximum supported TBS size corresponding to the category of terminal equipment is 30 bytes. Since 20 bytes is less than 30 bytes, this example satisfies the trigger condition.
- Table 1 exemplarily shows a possible correspondence table between the terminal device type and the data packet size threshold. As shown in this table, the maximum supported transport block corresponding to the terminal device type (or category) (the first column) The size TBS (second column) can be seen in Table 1.
- condition 2 may include any of the following:
- the terminal device receives the eighth indication information from the network device
- the terminal device receives the ninth indication information and the tenth indication information from the network device;
- the terminal device receives the ninth indication information or the tenth indication information from the network device.
- the eighth indication information is used to instruct the cell corresponding to the network device to support the terminal device to perform data transmission through the resources configured by the resource configuration information.
- the network device supports the terminal device to perform data transmission through the resources configured by the resource configuration information.
- the ninth indication information is used to indicate that when the terminal device is connected to the 5G core network through the network device, the network device supports the terminal device to perform data transmission through the resources configured by the resource configuration information.
- the "5G core network” mentioned in the embodiments of this application may be replaced by the "first type core network", both of which can be replaced.
- the first type of core network may be a 5G core network, a 6G core network or a core network corresponding to a future evolution technology, etc., which is not limited here.
- the tenth indication information is used to indicate that when the terminal device is connected to the evolved packet core network EPC through the network device, the network device supports the terminal device to perform data transmission through the resources configured by the resource configuration information.
- condition 2 it may be indicated by the value of a preset bit.
- condition 2 includes the eighth indication information
- the eighth indication information sent by the network device.
- the value carried by the specific bit is "0"
- condition 2 it may be indicated by the value of a preset bit.
- condition 2 includes the ninth indication information (which may or may not include the tenth indication information), it can be specified in a specific bit of the preset signaling. instruct.
- the value carried by the specific bit is "1"
- the network device when the value carried by the specific bit is "0", it can indicate that in the case where the terminal device is connected to the 5G core network through the network device, the network device does not support the terminal device through the resources configured by the resource configuration information. transmission. It can also be understood that the network device does not deliver the ninth indication information.
- condition 2 it may be indicated by the value of a preset bit.
- condition 2 includes tenth indication information (which may or may not include ninth indication information)
- it can be specified in a specific bit of the preset signaling. instruct.
- the value carried by the specific bit is "1"
- it can indicate that in the case that the terminal device is connected to the EPC through the network device, the network device supports the terminal device to use the resources configured by the resource configuration information. data transmission.
- the tenth indication information delivered by the network device it can also be understood as the tenth indication information delivered by the network device.
- the network device when the value carried by the specific bit is "0", it can indicate that when the terminal device is connected to the EPC through the network device, the network device does not support the configuration of the terminal device through the resource configuration information. resources for data transfer. It can also be understood that the network device does not deliver the tenth indication information.
- terminal devices may access the 5G core network through network devices, or may access the EPC core through the network devices.
- network may include the ninth indication information and/or the tenth indication information, the capabilities of the network devices under the two network standards can be distinguished, so that the deployment of the network devices can be more refined.
- any one of the eighth indication information, the ninth indication information and the tenth indication information mentioned in the above condition 2 may be carried in the system message.
- it can be carried in a broadcast message.
- the first request may also be used to indicate to the network device that the terminal device is interested in configuring the resources configured by the resource configuration information, and may provide the network device with information related to the resources configured by the resource configuration information, and so on , the network device may generate resource configuration information based on the first request.
- the first request may further include at least one of the following contents:
- the starting position of the resource configured by the resource configuration information requested by the terminal device
- the TBS of the resource configured by the resource configuration information requested by the terminal device
- the frequency domain resource information of the resource configured by the resource configuration information requested by the terminal device may include, for example, the size of the frequency domain resource, the location of the frequency domain resource (the bandwidth part (BWP) information where it is located), and the corresponding subclass of the frequency domain resource.
- BWP bandwidth part
- SCS Subcarrier Spacing
- the twelfth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device expects to use the RRC message to confirm the correct reception of the use of the configuration resource; exemplarily, the English content of the content indicated by the twelfth indication information can be written as: "Indicates RRC response message is preferred by the UE for acknowledging the reception of a transmission using PUR”.
- the first request message may be an RRC message.
- the terminal device Before the above step 201, the terminal device sends fifth indication information to the network device.
- the fifth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports data transmission in the RRC idle state or in the RRC inactive state (it can also be understood that the terminal device has the configuration based on the resource configuration information in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state. the ability of the resource to transmit data).
- the terminal device may transmit the above-mentioned fifth indication information through a newly defined signaling.
- the fifth indication information may be reported as a capability of the terminal device through a capability reporting mechanism of the terminal device.
- the fifth indication information may be sent through a newly defined signaling after the foregoing step 211 and before the foregoing step 201 .
- the fifth indication information may be carried in the first request in the foregoing step 211 .
- At least one of the following contents may be performed to determine whether the resource configuration information received through step 201 is valid, so that the resource configuration information may be used if it is determined that the resource configuration information is valid
- the configured resource (or, in other words, whether the resource configured by the resource configuration information is available is determined by at least one of the following contents):
- the target beam includes at least one of a target uplink beam and a target downlink beam. Therefore, in a possible implementation manner, before the terminal device performs data transmission between the target beam and the network device according to the resource configuration information, the Include at least one of the following:
- the terminal device may transmit data one or more times based on the resources configured by the resource configuration information. There may be a period of time between the time when a terminal device uses the resource configuration information to transmit data and the time when the resource configuration information is received. During this period of time, the terminal device may move and cause the resources configured by the resource configuration information. information is no longer accurate. Based on this, whether the resource configuration information is valid may be determined by judging that the above-mentioned timing advance TA is valid and/or the target beam is valid.
- Timing advance TA is to enable uplink transmissions sent by terminal devices at different distances from the network device to arrive at the network device at the same time or to have an arrival time within a cyclic prefix (Cyclic Prefix, CP) range.
- the timing advance TA is determined by the distance between the terminal equipment and the network equipment. As the terminal equipment moves, the terminal equipment needs to update the timing advance TA to maintain uplink synchronization. Based on this, in a possible implementation manner, when it is determined that the timing advance TA is valid, it may be determined that the resource configuration information is valid.
- the timing advance TA when it is determined that the timing advance TA is valid and the target uplink beam is determined to be valid, it is determined that the resource configuration information is valid. In another possible implementation, when it is determined that the timing advance TA is valid and the target downlink beam is determined to be valid, it is determined that the resource configuration information is valid. In another possible implementation, when the timing advance TA is determined to be valid, the target uplink beam is determined to be valid, and the target downlink beam is determined to be valid, the resource configuration information is determined to be valid.
- the resource configuration information may be determined to be valid when it is determined that the timing advance TA is valid, the resource configuration information includes first indication information for indicating the target uplink beam, and the target uplink beam is determined to be valid. In a possible implementation, when it is determined that the timing advance TA is valid, the resource configuration information includes second indication information for indicating the target downlink beam, and the target downlink beam is determined to be valid, the resource configuration information is determined to be valid.
- the resource configuration information includes second indication information for indicating the target downlink beam, and it is determined that the target downlink beam is valid, and the resource configuration information includes useful information
- the first indication information indicating the target uplink beam is determined and the target uplink beam is determined to be valid, it is determined that the resource configuration information is valid.
- the target uplink beam when the target uplink beam is valid, it is determined that the resource configuration information is valid. In another possible implementation, when the target downlink beam is valid, it is determined that the resource configuration information is valid. In another possible implementation, when the target uplink beam and the target downlink beam are valid, it is determined that the resource configuration information is valid.
- timing advance TA when at least one of the following conditions c1, c2 and c3 is satisfied, it may be determined that the timing advance TA is valid. In yet another possible implementation, when at least two of the following conditions c1, c2 and c3 are satisfied, it may be determined that the timing advance TA is valid. In yet another possible implementation, when the following conditions c1, c2 and c3 are all satisfied, it may be determined that the timing advance TA is valid.
- the conditions under which the terminal device determines that the timing advance TA is valid may be preset, or the terminal device may choose which conditions under which it determines that the timing advance TA is valid.
- the indication information may be used to instruct the terminal device under what conditions to judge that the timing advance TA is valid. For example, when the resource configuration information includes timer related information, it indicates that the terminal device needs to at least determine whether the above condition c1 is satisfied. For another example, when the resource configuration information includes the first threshold, it indicates that the terminal device at least needs to determine: in the above condition c2, "since the previous timing advance TA is valid, the measured increase in the RSRP of the reference signal received in the serving cell. is not greater than the first threshold" is satisfied.
- the resource configuration information when the resource configuration information includes the second threshold, it indicates that the terminal device needs to at least determine: in the above condition c2 "since the previous timing advance TA is valid, the measured serving cell reference signal received power RSRP reduction amount. is not greater than the second threshold" is satisfied.
- the resource configuration information when the resource configuration information includes relevant information about the effective area of the timing advance TA, it indicates that the terminal device needs to at least determine whether the above condition c3 is satisfied.
- Condition c 1 the timer for which the timing advance TA is valid is in the running state.
- the terminal device may acquire the related information of the timer, for example, the above-mentioned resource configuration information may include: the related information of the timer.
- the measured increase in the RSRP of the reference signal received power of the serving cell is not greater than the first threshold.
- the measured reduction of the RSRP of the reference signal received power of the serving cell is not greater than the second threshold.
- the first threshold and the second threshold may be set separately, and the first threshold and the second threshold may be equal or unequal. Either of the first threshold and the second threshold may be positive or negative.
- Condition c 3 the current position of the terminal device belongs to the preset timing advance TA effective area.
- the terminal device can judge whether the terminal device is currently in the effective area of the timing advance TA according to the ephemeris or its own position information.
- Timing advance TA valid area in English can be written as timing advance TA valid area.
- the terminal device can acquire the relevant information of the effective area of the timing advance TA, and the relevant information of the effective area of the timing advance TA can be used to indicate the effective area of the timing advance TA.
- the relevant information of the effective area of the timing advance TA may include the information of the ground area range and/or the angle information.
- the ephemeris mentioned in the embodiments of the present application may be satellite ephemerides, which can be used to calculate, predict, describe, and track the time, position, speed, and other operating states of flying objects (such as satellites). Satellite ephemerides can express celestial bodies. , precise parameters of satellites, spacecraft, missiles, space junk and other flying objects.
- the terminal device can obtain the satellite ephemeris from the network device or the core network device.
- the terminal device receives a system message from the network device, and the system The message includes the satellite ephemeris; or, the terminal device receives a non-access stratum (non-access stratum, NAS) message from the core network device, and the NAS message includes the satellite ephemeris.
- NAS non-access stratum
- the satellite ephemeris may be pre-configured, for example, the satellite ephemeris may be stored in a Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card of the terminal device, and then the terminal device may obtain it from the SIM card satellite ephemeris.
- SIM Subscriber Identity Module
- the terminal device can determine whether its current location belongs to the TA effective area according to the auxiliary parameter, and the auxiliary parameter can be the information of the area of the ground area.
- the auxiliary parameter may include the location information of the ground reference point
- the effective area of the timing advance TA may be, for example, centered on the ground reference point (for example, the center of a cell), and a preset distance (the preset distance also belongs to the auxiliary parameter) is an area of radius.
- the auxiliary parameter can also be angle information, for example, it can be an angle value, and the angle between the first line and the second line is smaller than the angle value, wherein the first line can be a preset position (for example, it can be a network
- the second line may be a connection between a position within the effective area of the timing advance TA and a preset position (eg, the position of a network device or satellite).
- Fig. 2c exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of the effective area of the timing advance TA. As shown in Fig. 2c, the angle between the first line and the second line can be as shown in (a) of the above Fig. 2c Angle 140. The included angle between the first line and the second line may be the angle 140 shown in (b) of FIG. 2c above.
- the terminal device when the cell coverage is small, the terminal device can determine whether it is in the center of the cell or the edge of the cell by using the received signal strength (e.g. RSRP) mentioned in the above condition c2, That is to say, when the coverage of the cell is small, the terminal device can judge whether the timing advance TA is valid through the above condition c2.
- the cell coverage is large (for example, satellite scenario-NTN)
- at least the condition c3 can be used to determine whether the timing advance TA is valid, thereby improving the accuracy of determining whether the timing advance TA is valid.
- the conditions under which the terminal equipment determines that the target downlink beam is valid may be preset, or the terminal equipment may choose by itself what conditions to use to determine that the target downlink beam is valid.
- the indication information may be used to instruct the terminal device under what conditions to judge that the target downlink beam is valid.
- the resource configuration information includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate the target uplink beam, and the target beam includes the target uplink beam:
- Condition d1 within the first time period, the third indication information is not received, the third indication information is used to indicate the updated target uplink beam, and the first time period is from when the terminal device receives the resource configuration information to the current time period.
- the manner d1 can be replaced with: since the last received the latest indication information for indicating the target uplink beam (referring to the latest one of the received first indication information and the third indication information After the indication information), as of the current moment, no other indication information for indicating the updated target uplink beam has been received.
- the first time period may be predefined.
- the terminal device receives indication information for indicating the first time period from the network device.
- the indication information for indicating the first time period is carried in one of a system message, a message of the RRC layer, a DCI and a MAC CE.
- the indication information for indicating the first time period may only indicate the duration of the first time period, and the start position and the end position of the first time period may be predefined.
- the indication information for indicating the first time period may indicate the duration of the first time period and the start position of the first time period, and the end position of the first time period may be a predetermined Defined.
- the indication information for indicating the first time period may indicate the duration of the first time period and the end position of the first time period, and the starting position of the first time period may be a preset Defined. In another possible implementation manner, the indication information for indicating the first time period may indicate the duration of the first time period, the start position and the end position of the first time period.
- Condition d2 within the second time period, the fourth indication information is not received, the fourth indication information is used to indicate the updated target downlink beam, and the second time period is from the time the terminal device receives the resource configuration information to the the current time period.
- the manner d2 may be replaced with: since the last time the latest indication information for indicating the target downlink beam (referring to the latest one of the received second indication information and the fourth indication information) After the indication information), as of the current moment, no other indication information for indicating the updated target downlink beam has been received.
- the second time period may be predefined.
- the terminal device receives indication information for indicating the second time period from the network device.
- the indication information for indicating the second time period is carried in one of a system message, a message of the RRC layer, a DCI and a MAC CE.
- the indication information for indicating the second time period may only indicate the duration of the second time period, and the start position and the end position of the second time period may be predefined.
- the indication information for indicating the second time period may indicate the duration of the second time period and the start position of the second time period, and the end position of the second time period may be a predetermined Defined.
- the indication information for indicating the second time period may indicate the duration of the second time period and the end position of the second time period, and the starting position of the second time period may be a predetermined Defined.
- the indication information for indicating the first time period may indicate the duration of the first time period, the start position and the end position of the first time period.
- the downlink beam determined by the terminal device according to the third preset rule (for example, it may be SSB or CSI-RS) is the same as the target downlink beam.
- the terminal device receives the downlink reference signal sent by the network device; the terminal device measures the downlink reference signal to obtain a measurement result; the terminal device determines the best quality according to the measurement result of the downlink reference signal
- the M beams are the same as the M beams in the target downlink beam, where M is a positive integer.
- condition d3 when it is determined that the condition d3 is satisfied, it is determined that the resource configuration information is available; otherwise, it is determined that the resource configured by the resource configuration information is unavailable.
- the corresponding English can be written as: if SSB or CSI-RS selected is not changed from the one indicated by gNB, UE can use PUR-Config; Else, UE doesn’t use PUR-Config.
- FIG. 2d exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of another data transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application, which is used for updating a target uplink beam.
- the scheme for updating the target uplink beam may include the following steps 221 to 223, and the scheme for updating the target uplink beam may be combined with any one of the previous schemes in FIG. 2a and FIG. 2b.
- steps 221 to 223 may be added after step 202 and before step 203 on the basis of FIG. 2 a and FIG. 2 b described above.
- steps 221 to 223 may be added after step 203 on the basis of FIG. 2 a and FIG. 2 b described above.
- Step 221 the terminal device determines the configuration information of the uplink reference signal. As shown in Figure 2d, the method includes:
- step 221 There are multiple possible implementation manners in step 221, such as the following manners e1 and e2:
- the terminal device receives the indication information used to indicate the configuration information of the uplink reference signal from the network device.
- the network device determines the configuration information of the uplink reference signal of the terminal device, and sends an instruction to the terminal device.
- the indication information used to indicate the configuration information of the uplink reference signal is the configuration information of the uplink reference signal.
- the terminal device receives the configuration information of the uplink reference signal from the network device, for example, The network device sends the SRS config indication to the terminal device.
- the indication information used to indicate the configuration information of the uplink reference signal may be information that can indicate the configuration information of the uplink reference signal, for example, the indication information used to indicate the configuration information of the uplink reference signal may be Indication: the terminal equipment takes the configuration information of the uplink reference signal in the connected state as the configuration information of the uplink reference signal in the idle state or the inactive state. For example, such as a preset bit in a preset signaling, when the bit value on the preset bit is 1, the terminal device is instructed to use the configuration information of the uplink reference signal in the connected state as the idle state. or the configuration information of the uplink reference signal in the inactive state.
- the resource configuration information and the indication information for indicating the configuration information of the uplink reference signal may be respectively sent to the terminal device through two signalings.
- the resource configuration information and the indication information for indicating the configuration information of the uplink reference signal may also be sent to the terminal device through a piece of signaling.
- the resource configuration information includes indication information for indicating the configuration information of the uplink reference signal, and the terminal device determines the configuration information of the uplink reference signal according to the resource configuration information.
- the terminal device sends sixth indication information to the network device.
- the sixth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports sending uplink reference signals in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state (it can also be understood that the terminal device has the ability to send the uplink reference signal in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state. ).
- the network device may configure the configuration information of the uplink reference signal for the terminal device after receiving the sixth indication information. It is a request for requesting the network device to configure the configuration information of the uplink reference signal for the terminal device.
- the terminal device may transmit the above-mentioned sixth indication information through a newly defined signaling.
- the sixth indication information may be reported as a capability of the terminal device through a capability reporting mechanism of the terminal device.
- the sixth indication information may be sent through a newly defined signaling.
- the sixth indication information may be carried in the first request in the foregoing step 211 .
- the terminal device determines the configuration information of the uplink reference signal according to the fourth preset rule.
- the terminal device may determine the configuration information of the uplink reference signal according to the fourth preset rule.
- the terminal device determines the configuration of the uplink reference signal used when it is in the connected state
- the information is: configuration information of the uplink reference signal.
- the terminal device in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state of the radio access control sends the uplink reference signal by using the configuration information of the uplink reference signal in the connected state.
- the configuration information of the uplink reference signal may be the configuration information of a sounding reference signal (Sounding reference signal, SRS).
- the configuration of the SRS may define a list of SRS resources.
- Step 222 the terminal device is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state of the radio access control, and the terminal device sends the uplink reference signal to the network device according to the configuration information of the uplink reference signal.
- Step 223 the network device determines the updated target uplink beam, and sends a first message to the terminal device, where the first message includes third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate the updated target uplink beam.
- the network device sends a first message to the terminal device when it is determined that the target uplink beam has changed (that is, the currently determined target uplink beam is different from the previously determined target uplink beam), the first The message includes third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate the updated target uplink beam.
- the terminal device receives the first message from the network device.
- the terminal device may receive the first message from the network device according to the resource configured in the resource configuration information.
- the first message may be at least one of DCI, MAC CE and RRC messages.
- the network device may carry the third indication information in the DCI scheduling subsequent data transmission (SDT), or use a MAC CE to carry the third indication information, and the MAC CE may be used in the scheduling It is sent on the PDSCH indicated by the DCI of the SDT.
- the terminal device may further receive at least one of an identifier of the resource configuration information and an effective time of the third indication information.
- the first message further includes at least one of an identifier of the resource configuration information and an effective time of the third indication information.
- the identifier of the resource configuration information, the effective time of the third indication information, and the third indication information may be carried in the same signaling.
- the terminal device needs to use the resource configuration information after the above step 223
- the updated target uplink beam can be determined according to the identifier of the resource configuration information, and according to the effective time of the third indication information, during the effective period of the updated target uplink beam, the updated target uplink beam is used. Beams send data.
- the embodiments of the present application provide a scheme for updating the target uplink beam under the transmission mechanism of the resources configured by the resource configuration information, and in the scheme for updating the target uplink beam, the terminal equipment and the network equipment can be in the RRC idle state or the RRC After the inactive state is completed, it is not necessary to enter the RRC connected state to obtain the updated target uplink beam, thereby saving signaling overhead. On the other hand, since the terminal equipment may move, the target uplink beam may be inaccurate. When the terminal equipment uses the initial target uplink beam configured by the network equipment in the RRC connection state, it may cause uplink data transmission failure. Occurs, if the network device still does not update the target uplink beam when performing the retransmission resource indication, the retransmission may also fail. It can be seen that updating the target uplink beam through the solution provided in the embodiment of the present application can be beneficial to SDT (Small Data Tansmission) transmission.
- SDT Mall Data Tansmission
- FIG. 2e exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of another data transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application, which is used for updating a target downlink beam.
- the scheme for updating the target downlink beam may include the following steps 231 to 233, and the scheme for updating the target downlink beam may be combined with any one of the previous schemes in FIG. 2a and FIG. 2b.
- steps 231 to 233 may be added after step 202 and before step 203 on the basis of FIG. 2 a and FIG. 2 b described above.
- steps 231 to 233 may be added after step 203 on the basis of FIG. 2 a and FIG. 2 b described above.
- Step 231 the terminal device determines the configuration information of the downlink reference signal
- step 231 There are many possible implementation manners in step 231, for example, as shown in the following manners f1 and f2:
- the terminal device receives the indication information used to indicate the configuration information of the downlink reference signal from the network device.
- the network device determines the configuration information of the downlink reference signal of the terminal device, and sends an instruction to the terminal device.
- the indication information used to indicate the configuration information of the downlink reference signal is the configuration information of the downlink reference signal. In this way, the terminal device receives the configuration information of the downlink reference signal from the network device.
- the indication information used to indicate the configuration information of the downlink reference signal may be information that can indicate the configuration information of the downlink reference signal, for example, the indication information used to indicate the configuration information of the downlink reference signal may be Indication: the terminal device takes the configuration information of the downlink reference signal in the connected state as the configuration information of the downlink reference signal in the idle state or the inactive state. For example, such as a preset bit in a preset signaling, when the bit value on the preset bit is 1, the terminal device is instructed to use the configuration information of the downlink reference signal in the connected state as the idle state. or the configuration information of the downlink reference signal in the inactive state.
- the resource configuration information and the indication information for indicating the configuration information of the downlink reference signal may be respectively sent to the terminal device through two signalings.
- the resource configuration information and the indication information for indicating the configuration information of the downlink reference signal can also be sent to the terminal device through a piece of signaling.
- the resource configuration information includes indication information for indicating the configuration information of the downlink reference signal, and the terminal device determines the configuration information of the downlink reference signal according to the resource configuration information.
- the network device when the network device sends the indication information for indicating the configuration information of the uplink reference signal to the terminal device, and the network device sends the indication information for indicating the configuration information of the downlink reference signal to the terminal device, Any two items of the indication information used to indicate the configuration information of the uplink reference signal, the indication information used to indicate the configuration information of the downlink reference signal, and the resource configuration information may be in the same signaling, or in two different signaling. order.
- the terminal device sends seventh indication information to the network device.
- the seventh indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports measuring downlink reference signals in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state.
- the seventh indication information can also be used to indicate that the terminal device supports the downlink reference signal measurement in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state, and reports the obtained measurement result to the network device (it can also be understood that the terminal device has: in the RRC idle state or RRC inactive state to measure downlink reference signals and report the obtained measurement results to the network equipment).
- the terminal device may transmit the above seventh indication information through a newly defined signaling.
- the seventh indication information may be reported as a capability of the terminal device through a capability reporting mechanism of the terminal device.
- the seventh indication information may be sent through a newly defined signaling after the above-mentioned step 211 and before the above-mentioned step 201 .
- the seventh indication information may be carried in the first request in the foregoing step 211 .
- the terminal device determines the configuration information of the downlink reference signal according to the sixth preset rule.
- the terminal device may determine the configuration information of the downlink reference signal according to the sixth preset rule.
- the terminal device determines the configuration of the downlink reference signal used when it is in the connected state.
- the information is: configuration information of the downlink reference signal.
- the terminal equipment in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state of the radio access control sends the downlink reference signal by using the configuration information of the downlink reference signal in the connected state.
- the terminal device is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state, and the terminal device performs the following steps:
- Step 232 the network device sends a downlink reference signal, and the terminal device measures the downlink reference signal sent by the network device according to the configuration information of the downlink reference signal, and obtains a measurement result.
- Step 233 the terminal device reports indication information for indicating the measurement result to the network device.
- the terminal device may report the measurement results of each beam to the network device, and the network device selects the target downlink beam.
- the terminal device determines M candidate downlink beams according to the measurement result and the fifth preset rule; M is a positive integer.
- the terminal device sends the eleventh indication information to the network device according to the resource configuration information (for example, the eleventh indication information can be sent through the PUSCH configuration information in the resource configuration information), and the eleventh indication information is used to indicate the M candidate downlink beams, update
- the latter target downlink beam is one of the M candidate downlink beams.
- M is not greater than N, and N is the number of candidate downlink beams to be reported by the terminal equipment configured by the network equipment.
- the fifth preset rule includes at least one of the following:
- the candidate downlink beams in the M candidate downlink beams include: the downlink beams whose signal quality in the measurement result is not less than the first threshold;
- the K downlink beams are sorted from high to low, the M candidate downlink beams are the first M downlink beams in the K downlink beams, K is an integer greater than M, and each downlink beam in the K downlink beams The signal quality is not less than the first threshold.
- the signal may include layer 1 received reference signal power (layer 1 reference signal received power, L1-RSRP), layer 1 received reference signal quality (layer 1 reference signal received quality, L1-RSRQ), etc. .
- layer 1 received reference signal power layer 1 reference signal received power, L1-RSRP
- layer 1 received reference signal quality layer 1 reference signal received quality, L1-RSRQ
- the terminal device can report the two downlink beams to the network device.
- the value of M configured by the network device is 3, and the terminal device determines through measurement that there are 4 downlink beams as candidate downlink beams, then the terminal device sorts the 4 downlink beams from high to low according to the signal quality, and assigns The ranking is that the top three candidate downlink beams are reported to the network device.
- Step 234 the network device determines the updated target downlink beam.
- the network device sends the second message to the terminal device, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the second message, and the second message includes fourth indication information.
- the fourth indication information is used to indicate the updated target downlink beam.
- the terminal device in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state may receive the second message according to the resource configuration information.
- the terminal device may request the network device to re-indicate the target downlink beam by reporting the candidate downlink beam, that is, to send the updated target downlink beam.
- the network device may, based on beam training, when determining that the target downlink beam has changed (that is, the currently determined target downlink beam is different from the previously determined target downlink beam), send the message to the terminal. The device sends fourth indication information.
- the second message may be at least one of DCI, MAC CE and RRC messages.
- the network device may carry the fourth indication information in the DCI scheduling subsequent data transmission (SDT), or use a MAC CE to carry the fourth indication information, and the MAC CE may be used in the scheduling Sent on the PDSCH indicated by the DCI of the SDT.
- the terminal device may further receive at least one of the identifier of the resource configuration information and the effective time of the fourth indication information.
- the second message further includes: at least one of an identifier of the resource configuration information and an effective time of the fourth indication information.
- the terminal device can also receive the identifier of the resource configuration information and the effective time of the fourth indication information and the fourth indication information can be carried in the same signaling.
- the terminal device can When the downlink data needs to be sent based on the resource configuration information, the updated target downlink beam can be determined according to the identifier of the resource configuration information, and according to the effective time of the fourth indication information, during the effective period of the updated target downlink beam, use the updated target downlink beam.
- the updated target downlink beam sends data.
- a scheme for updating the target downlink beam is provided, and in the scheme for updating the target downlink beam, the terminal equipment and the network equipment can be in the RRC idle state or the RRC After the inactive state is completed, it is not necessary to enter the RRC connected state to obtain the updated target downlink beam, thereby saving signaling overhead.
- the target downlink beam may be inaccurate.
- the terminal equipment uses the initial target downlink beam configured by the network equipment in the RRC connection state, it may cause downlink data transmission failure. Occurs, if the network device still does not update the target downlink beam when retransmitting the resource indication, the retransmission may also fail. It can be seen that updating the target downlink beam through the solution provided by the embodiment of the present application can improve the success rate of data transmission .
- the third indication information and the fourth indication information may be carried in the same signaling, or may be carried in different signaling (it can also be understood that the first message and the second message may be the same message, or two different messages).
- the signaling may also include an identifier of resource configuration information.
- the effective time of the fourth indication information and the effective time of the third indication information may also be included.
- the effective time of the fourth indication information and the effective time of the third indication information may be the same time.
- FIG. 2f exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of a signaling. As shown in FIG. 2f, the signaling in FIG.
- the signaling also includes reserved bits, the reserved bits are represented by R, and the reserved bits can carry the identifier of resource configuration information.
- the reserved bit may further carry the effective time of the fourth indication information and the effective time of the third indication information.
- each network element in the above-mentioned implementation includes corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules for executing each function.
- the present invention can be implemented in hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software in conjunction with the units and algorithm steps of each example described in the embodiments disclosed herein. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each particular application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of the present invention.
- FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the communication device may be a terminal device or a network device, or a chip or a circuit, for example, it may be provided in a terminal device.
- a chip or circuit for example, a chip or circuit that can be provided in a network device.
- the communication device 1301 may further include a bus system, wherein the processor 1302, the memory 1304, and the transceiver 1303 may be connected through the bus system.
- the above-mentioned processor 1302 may be a chip.
- the processor 1302 may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a system on chip (SoC), or a system on chip (SoC). It can be a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), a digital signal processing circuit (DSP), or a microcontroller (microcontroller). unit, MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
- FPGA field programmable gate array
- ASIC application specific integrated circuit
- SoC system on chip
- SoC system on chip
- SoC system on chip
- MCU microcontroller
- MCU programmable logic device
- PLD programmable logic device
- each step of the above-mentioned method can be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor 1302 or an instruction in the form of software.
- the steps of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed by a hardware processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor 1302 .
- the software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art.
- the storage medium is located in the memory 1304, and the processor 1302 reads the information in the memory 1304, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
- processor 1302 in this embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip, which has a signal processing capability.
- each step of the above method embodiments may be completed by a hardware integrated logic circuit in a processor or an instruction in the form of software.
- the aforementioned processors may be general purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components .
- DSPs digital signal processors
- ASICs application specific integrated circuits
- FPGAs field programmable gate arrays
- the methods, steps, and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of this application can be implemented or executed.
- a general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
- the steps of the method disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
- the software module can be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art.
- the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
- the memory 1304 in this embodiment of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
- the non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
- Volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache.
- RAM random access memory
- DRAM dynamic random access memory
- SDRAM synchronous DRAM
- SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
- ESDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
- SLDRAM synchronous link dynamic random access memory
- direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM
- the communication apparatus may include a processor 1302 , a transceiver 1303 and a memory 1304 .
- the memory 1304 is used to store instructions
- the processor 1302 is used to execute the instructions stored in the memory 1304, so as to implement the relevant solutions of the terminal device in any one or any of the corresponding methods as shown in FIG. 1a to FIG. 2f above. .
- the transceiver 1303 is configured to receive resource configuration information from the network device.
- the processor 1302 is configured to determine the target beam, and when the terminal device is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state, according to the resource configuration information, use the target beam to perform data transmission with the network device through the transceiver 1303, the target The beam includes at least one of a target uplink beam and a target downlink beam.
- the processor 1302 is specifically configured to: determine the target beam according to the first indication information received from the network device through the transceiver 1303, and the first indication information is used to indicate the target uplink beam; or, according to the first preset rule, determine the target uplink beam.
- the processor 1302 is specifically configured to: determine the uplink beam used when the PUSCH is transmitted for the last time in the RRC connected state as the target uplink beam.
- the processor 1302 is specifically configured to: according to the second indication information received from the network device through the transceiver 1303, the second indication information is used to indicate the target downlink beam; or, according to the second preset rule, determine the target downlink beam.
- the processor 1302 is specifically configured to: determine that the downlink beam corresponding to the control resource set where the last time of monitoring the physical downlink control channel PDCCH in the RRC connected state is located is: : target downlink beam;
- the processor 1302 is further configured to perform at least one of the following before performing data transmission between the transceiver 1303 and the network device: determine that the target beam is valid; It is determined that the timing advance TA is valid.
- the processor 1302 is specifically configured to determine that the timing advance TA is valid when it is determined that at least one of the following is satisfied: the timer for which the timing advance TA is valid is in a running state ; Since the previous timing advance TA is valid, the measured serving cell reference signal received power RSRP increase is not greater than the first threshold; since the previous timing advance TA is valid, the measured serving cell reference signal received power RSRP The decrease is not greater than the first threshold. Two thresholds; the current location of the terminal equipment is within the preset timing advance TA effective area.
- the processor 1302 is further configured to: determine that the third indication information is not received through the transceiver 1303 within the first time period, and determine that the target uplink beam is valid ; The third indication information is used to indicate the updated target uplink beam.
- the processor 1302 is specifically configured to determine that the target downlink beam is valid according to at least one of the following: the downlink beam determined according to the third preset rule is the same as the target The downlink beams are the same; it is determined that the fourth indication information is not received through the transceiver 1303 within the second time period, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate the updated target downlink beam.
- the transceiver 1303 is further configured to: receive a downlink reference signal sent by the network device.
- the processor 1302 is specifically configured to: measure the downlink reference signal to obtain a measurement result; the terminal device determines, according to the measurement result of the downlink reference signal, that the M beams with the best quality are the same as the M beams in the target downlink beam, and M is positive Integer.
- the transceiver 1303 is further configured to: send a first request to the network device, where the first request is used to request resource configuration information.
- the transceiver 1303 is further configured to: send at least one of the fifth indication information, the sixth indication information and the seventh indication information to the network device.
- the fifth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal equipment supports data transmission in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state;
- the sixth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal equipment supports sending the uplink reference signal in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state;
- Seven indication information is used to indicate that the terminal equipment supports the downlink reference signal measurement in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state.
- the processor 1302 is further configured to: determine that at least one of the following conditions is satisfied:
- the size of the current service data packet to be sent is not larger than the maximum supported transmission data block size corresponding to the terminal device.
- the transceiver 1303 is further configured to: when the terminal equipment is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state, according to the configuration information of the uplink reference signal , and send the uplink reference signal to the network device.
- the transceiver 1303 is further configured to: receive a first message from the network device; the first message includes the third indication information, the identifier of the resource configuration information and the At least one item of the effective time of the third indication information.
- the processor 1302 is further configured to: receive, through the transceiver 1303, the indication information used to indicate the configuration information of the uplink reference signal from the network device; or, According to the fourth preset rule, the configuration information of the uplink reference signal is determined.
- the processor 1302 is specifically configured to: determine the configuration information of the uplink reference signal used in the connected state as: the configuration information of the uplink reference signal.
- the processor 1302 is further configured to: when the terminal equipment is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state, according to the configuration information of the downlink reference signal, to the network equipment
- the sent downlink reference signal is measured to obtain the measurement result;
- the indication information used to indicate the measurement result is sent to the network device through the transceiver 1303;
- the second message sent by the network device is received through the transceiver 1303 according to the resource configuration information;
- the second message includes Fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the updated target downlink beam.
- the processor 1302 is further configured to: determine M candidate downlink beams according to the measurement result and the fifth preset rule; M is a positive integer.
- the transceiver 1303 is further configured to: send eleventh indication information to the network device, where the eleventh indication information is used to indicate M candidate downlink beams, and the updated target downlink beam is one of the M candidate downlink beams.
- the processor 1302 is further configured to: according to the indication information received from the network equipment through the transceiver 1303 and used to indicate the configuration information of the downlink reference signal , determine the configuration information of the downlink reference signal;
- the configuration information of the downlink reference signal is determined, and the configuration information of the downlink reference signal is determined.
- the processor 1302 is specifically configured to: determine the configuration information of the downlink reference signal used in the connected state as: the configuration information of the downlink reference signal.
- the transceiver 1303 is further configured to: send an acknowledgement message to the network device; and the acknowledgement message carries the identifier of the resource configuration information.
- the transceiver 1303 is configured to send resource configuration information to the terminal device; the processor 1302 is configured to determine a target beam, where the target beam includes a target uplink beam and a target At least one of the downlink beams; according to the resource configuration information, use the target beam to transmit data through the transceiver 1303 with the terminal equipment in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state of the radio access control.
- the transceiver 1303 is further configured to: send one or both of the first indication information and the second indication information to the terminal device, the first indication The information is used to indicate the target uplink beam, and the second indication information is used to indicate the target downlink beam.
- the transceiver 1303 is further configured to: receive a first request from the terminal device, where the first request is used to request resource configuration information.
- the transceiver 1303 is further configured to: receive at least one of the fifth indication information, the sixth indication information and the seventh indication information from the terminal device .
- the transceiver 1303 is further configured to: send eighth indication information to the terminal equipment, where the eighth indication information is used to indicate that the cell corresponding to the network equipment supports the terminal equipment Data transfer via preconfigured resources, or;
- the transceiver 1303 is further configured to: receive an uplink reference signal from a terminal device in an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state.
- the processor 1302 is further configured to: determine the updated target uplink beam according to the uplink reference signal; send a first message to the terminal device through the transceiver 1303; the first message includes third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate the update the target uplink beam.
- the transceiver 1303 is further configured to: send indication information for indicating the configuration information of the uplink reference signal to the terminal device.
- the processor 1302 is further configured to: determine the configuration information of the downlink reference signal; send the configuration information to the terminal device through the transceiver 1303 according to the configuration information of the downlink reference signal Downlink reference signal; according to the indication information used to indicate the measurement result, determine the updated target downlink beam.
- the transceiver 1303 is further configured to: receive indication information sent by the terminal device for indicating the measurement result; send a second message to the terminal device; the second message includes fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate the updated target Downlink beam.
- the transceiver 1303 is further configured to: send indication information for indicating the configuration information of the downlink reference signal to the terminal device.
- the transceiver 1303 is further configured to: receive an acknowledgment message sent by the terminal device; and the acknowledgment message carries the identifier of the resource configuration information.
- FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the communication apparatus 1401 may include a communication interface 1403 , a processor 1402 and a memory 1404 .
- the communication interface 1403 is used for inputting and/or outputting information;
- the processor 1402 is used for executing computer programs or instructions, so that the communication device 1401 implements the method on the terminal device side in the above-mentioned related solutions of FIG. 1a to FIG. 2f, or makes the communication device 1401 implements the method on the network device side in the above-mentioned related solutions of FIG. 1a to FIG. 2f.
- the communication interface 1403 can implement the solution implemented by the transceiver 1303 in FIG. 3
- the processor 1402 can implement the solution implemented by the processor 1302 in FIG. 3
- the memory 1404 can implement the memory 1304 in FIG. 3. The implemented solution will not be repeated here.
- FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the communication apparatus 1501 may be a terminal device or a network device, or a chip or a circuit.
- the communication apparatus 1501 can be set Chips or circuits used in terminal equipment or network equipment.
- the communication apparatus may correspond to the terminal device in the above method.
- the communication apparatus may implement the steps performed by the terminal device in any one or more of the corresponding methods shown in FIG. 1a to FIG. 2f above.
- the communication apparatus may include a processing unit 1502 , a communication unit 1503 and a storage unit 1504 .
- the processing unit 1502 may be a processor or a controller, for example, a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), general-purpose processor, digital signal processing (DSP), application specific integrated circuit (application specific integrated circuit) circuits, ASIC), field programmable gate array (FPGA), or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components, or any combination thereof. It may implement or execute the various exemplary logical blocks, modules and circuits described in connection with this disclosure.
- a processor may also be a combination that implements computing functions, such as a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, and the like.
- the storage unit 1504 may be a memory.
- the communication unit 1503 is an interface circuit of the device for receiving signals from other devices. For example, when the device is implemented as a chip, the communication unit 1503 is an interface circuit used by the chip to receive signals from other chips or devices, or an interface circuit used by the chip to send signals to other chips or devices.
- the communication apparatus 1501 may be a terminal device or a network device in any of the foregoing embodiments, and may also be a chip for performing cell search.
- the processing unit 1502 may be, for example, a processor
- the communication unit 1503 may be, for example, a transceiver.
- the transceiver may include a radio frequency circuit
- the storage unit may be, for example, a memory.
- the processing unit 1502 may be, for example, a processor
- the communication unit 1503 may be, for example, an input/output interface, a pin, or a circuit.
- the processing unit 1502 can execute computer-executed instructions stored in a storage unit.
- the storage unit is a storage unit in the chip, such as a register, a cache, etc.
- the storage unit can also be a session management network element located in the A storage unit outside the chip, such as read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (RAM), etc.
- ROM read-only memory
- RAM random access memory
- the communication device 1501 is the above-mentioned terminal device, and the communication unit 1503 is configured to receive resource configuration information from the network device.
- the processing unit 1502 is used to determine the target beam, and when the terminal device is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state, according to the resource configuration information, use the target beam to perform data transmission with the network device through the communication unit 1503, and the target beam includes the target uplink. at least one of the beam and the target downlink beam.
- the communication apparatus 1501 is the above-mentioned network device, and the communication unit 1503 is configured to send resource configuration information to the terminal device.
- the processing unit 1502 is configured to determine a target beam, where the target beam includes at least one of a target uplink beam and a target downlink beam; according to the resource configuration information, use the target beam and the terminal equipment in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state of the radio access control Data transmission is performed through the communication unit 1503 .
- each unit in the foregoing communication apparatus 1501 may refer to the implementation of the corresponding method embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
- the division of the units of the above communication apparatus is only a division of logical functions, and may be fully or partially integrated into a physical entity in actual implementation, or may be physically separated.
- the communication unit 1503 may be implemented by the transceiver 1303 shown in FIG. 3 above, and the processing unit 1502 may be implemented by the processor 1302 shown in FIG. 3 above.
- the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code or instructions, when the computer program code or instructions are run on a computer, the computer is made to execute FIG. 1a The method of any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 2f.
- the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable medium stores program codes, and when the program codes are run on a computer, the computer is made to execute FIG. 1a to FIG. 2f The method of any one of the illustrated embodiments.
- the present application further provides a chip system, where the chip system may include a processor.
- the processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to perform the method of any one of the embodiments shown in Figures 1a to 2f.
- the chip system further includes a memory.
- Memory used to store computer programs (also called code, or instructions).
- the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the device installed with the chip system executes the method of any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 1a to FIG. 2f.
- the present application further provides a system, which includes the aforementioned one or more terminal devices and one or more network devices.
- a computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
- the computer may be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
- Computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website site, computer, server, or data center over a wire (e.g.
- coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless means to transmit to another website site, computer, server or data center.
- a computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, a data center, or the like that includes an integration of one or more available media.
- Useful media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, magnetic tape), optical media (eg, high-density digital video disc (DVD)), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state disc (SSD)) )Wait.
- the network equipment in the above apparatus embodiments corresponds to the terminal equipment and the network equipment or terminal equipment in the method embodiments, and corresponding steps are performed by corresponding modules or units, for example, the communication unit (transceiver) performs the receiving or sending in the method embodiments.
- the steps other than sending and receiving can be performed by the processing unit (processor).
- processor For functions of specific units, reference may be made to corresponding method embodiments.
- the number of processors may be one or more.
- a component may be, but is not limited to, a process running on a processor, a processor, an object, an executable, a thread of execution, a program, and/or a computer.
- an application running on a computing device and the computing device may be components.
- One or more components may reside within a process and/or thread of execution, and a component may be localized on one computer and/or distributed between two or more computers.
- these components can execute from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon.
- a component may, for example, be based on a signal having one or more data packets (eg, data from two components interacting with another component between a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet interacting with other systems via signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
- data packets eg, data from two components interacting with another component between a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet interacting with other systems via signals
- the disclosed system, apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners.
- the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative.
- the division of units is only a logical function division.
- there may be other division methods for example, multiple units or components may be combined or integrated. to another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
- the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
- Units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
- each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
- the functions, if implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as stand-alone products, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
- the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product in essence, or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution.
- the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods of the various embodiments of the present application.
- the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
一种数据传输方法、装置、可读存储介质和系统,其中方法包括,终端设备接收来自网络设备的资源配置信息,终端设备处于无线接入控制RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态,终端设备可以根据资源配置信息,使用目标波束与网络设备进行数据传输。如此,终端设备处于RRC非激活态或RRC空闲态的情况下,可以明确终端设备使用预配置资源时所使用的波束,可以避免因波束不准确而导致终端设备进行数据传输失败的问题,此外,终端设备可以通过预先获取的资源配置信息所对应的资源进行数据传输,减少终端设备在传输数据时进入RRC连接态获取资源配置信息带来的时延和信令开销。
Description
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种数据传输方法、装置、可读存储介质和系统。
随着无线通信技术的发展,物联网(Internet of things,IoT)在人们的日常生活中已经越来越常见了,所谓物联网,指的就是连接物与物的通信网络。其中,窄带物联网(Narrow Band Internet of Things,NB-IoT)以及海量物联网通信(Massive Machine Type Communication,mMTC)是两种非常有应用前景的物联网技术。典型的物联网应用包括智能电网、智能农业、智能交通、智能家居以及环境检测等各个方面。由于物联网需要应用在多种场景中比如从室外到室内,从地上到地下,因而对物联网的设计提出了很多特殊的要求。物联网中的终端设备大部分时间都是处于空闲态。偶尔需要上报一些状态信息,例如路灯的状态、水电表的状态等。
为了减少信令开销和不必要的功耗,当终端设备处于RRC连接态时,网络设备可以为终端设备分配预配置资源(如,预配置上行资源pre-configured uplink resource,PUR)。当终端设备处于RRC非激活态或RRC空闲态,有数据包要传输时,可以使用预配置资源和网络设备进行传输。
当前的PUR机制还停留在演进型分组核心网(evolved packet core,EPC)阶段。随着网络(例如,新无线(New Radio,NR))的发展,越来越多的终端设备将基于NR与网络设备之间建立连接。而在NR网络中当终端设备处于RRC非激活态或RRC空闲态时,如何与网络设备之间传输数据是目前亟需解决的问题。
发明内容
本申请提供一种数据传输方法、装置、可读存储介质和系统,用于使处于RRC非激活态或RRC空闲态的终端设备进行数据传输,从而降低功耗和信令开销。
第一方面,本申请实施例中终端设备接收来自网络设备的资源配置信息,终端设备确定目标波束,目标波束包括目标上行波束和目标下行波束中的至少一个,终端设备处于无线接入控制RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态,终端设备根据资源配置信息,使用目标波束与网络设备进行数据传输。
如此,终端设备处于RRC非激活态或RRC空闲态的情况下,由终端设备来确定目标波束,从而通过对终端设备行为进行规范,可以明确终端设备使用预配置资源时所使用的上行波束和/或下行波束,进而避免因波束不准确而导致终端设备进行数据传输失败的问题,此外,终端设备可以通过预先获取的资源配置信息所对应的资源进行数据传输,减少终端设备在传输数据时进入RRC连接态获取资源配置信息带来的时延和信令开销。
在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息承载于RRC连接释放消息、RRC释放消息、RRC连接恢复消息和RRC恢复消息中的一项。
如此,一方面,由网络侧来指示资源配置信息,可以使资源配置更加灵活,另一方面,在现有的信令中携带资源配置信息,更好地兼容现有技术。
在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备可以通过随机接入过程,或者在连接态下获取资 源配置信息,从而在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态使用该资源配置信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备确定目标波束,包括:终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息;第一指示信息用于指示目标上行波束。
如此,一方面,由网络设备来指示目标上行波束,明确了终端设备在使用资源配置信息与网络设备进行数据传输时所使用的上行波束,另一方面,采用网络侧指示的方式,可以使得目标上行波束的选择更加灵活。
在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息包括第一指示信息。如此,一方面,可以节省信令开销,另一方面,可以进一步兼容现有技术。
在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备根据第一预设规则,确定目标上行波束。在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备根据第一预设规则,确定目标上行波束,包括:终端设备确定在RRC连接态最后一次传输PUSCH时所使用的上行波束为目标上行波束。如此,由终端设备来确定目标上行波束,从而通过对终端设备的行为进行规范,明确了终端设备在使用资源配置信息与网络设备进行数据传输时所使用的上行波束,避免终端设备确定上行波束不清楚的问题。
在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息;第二指示信息用于指示目标下行波束,终端设备根据第二指示信息确定目标下行波束。如此,一方面,由网络设备来指示目标下行波束,明确了终端设备在使用资源配置信息与网络设备进行数据传输时所使用的下行波束,另一方面,采用网络侧指示的方式,可以使得目标下行波束的选择更加灵活。
在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息包括第二指示信息。如此,一方面,可以节省信令开销,另一方面,可以进一步兼容现有技术。
又一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备根据第二预设规则,确定目标下行波束。
在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备根据第二预设规则,确定目标下行波束,包括:终端设备确定在RRC连接态最后一次监听物理下行控制信道PDCCH时机所在的控制资源集合对应的下行波束为:目标下行波束。在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备确定预设标识的控制资源集合对应的下行波束为目标下行波束。在一种可能的实施方式中,预设标识的控制资源集合为标识0的控制资源集合。如此,由终端设备来确定目标下行波束,可以明确网络设备与终端设备进行数据传输时所使用的下行波束,可以避免网络设备和终端设备确定下行波束不清楚的问题。
在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备根据资源配置信息,使用目标波束与网络设备之间进行数据传输之前,还包括以下至少一项:确定目标波束有效;确定定时提前TA有效。如此,可以在确定资源配置信息有效的情况下使用,进而提高数据传输的成功率。
在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备在确定满足以下至少一项时,确定定时提前TA有效:定时提前TA有效的定时器处于运行状态;自前一次定时提前TA有效起,测得的服务小区参考信号接收功率RSRP增加量不大于第一阈值;自前一次定时提前TA有效起,测得的服务小区参考信号接收功率RSRP减少量不大于第二阈值;终端设备当前所处的位置属于预设的定时提前TA有效区域内。在该可能的实施方式中,若可以基于定时提前TA有效区域判定定时提前TA是否有效,则当适用于高空平台等系统时,由于小区的中心区域和边界区域的RSRP的差值较小,
如此,一方面,明确了终端设备确定定时提前TA有效的流程。另一方面,通过网络 设备提供辅助信息(例如第一阈值、第二阈值)可以增加网络控制的灵活性,增加定时提前TA有效判定的准确性。
在一种可能的实施方式中,方法还包括:终端设备确定在第一时间段内未收到第三指示信息,确定目标上行波束有效;第三指示信息用于指示更新后的目标上行波束。也就是说,当未收到其他用于目标上行波束有更新的消息时,则当前的目标上行波束是最新的,可以视为其有效。
由此,一方面,通过第三指示提供了网络设备调控的灵活性,实现较为方便,另一方面,明确了更新终端设备的目标上行波束更新过程。
在一种可能的实施方式中,第一时间段可以是指从确定了目标上行波束的时间起始至当前时刻。在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备接收来自网络设备的用于指示第一时间段的指示信息。在又一种可能的实施方式中,第一时间段为预定义的。
在一种可能的实施方式中,用于指示第一时间段的指示信息承载于系统消息、RRC层的消息、DCI和MAC CE中的一项。如此,可以提高方案的灵活性。
在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备根据以下至少一项,确定目标下行波束有效:终端设备根据第三预设规则确定出的下行波束与目标下行波束相同;终端设备确定在第二时间段内未收到第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示更新后的目标下行波束。若终端设备根据第三预设规则确定出的下行波束与目标下行波束相同,则在一种可能的情况中,可以说明当前的目标下行波束还是质量较优的波束,被更新的可能性较小。终端设备确定在第二时间段内未收到第四指示信息,则在一种可能的实施方式中,当未收到其他用于目标下行波束有更新的消息时,则证明当前的目标下行波束是最新的。
在一种可能的实施方式中,第二时间段可以是指从确定了目标下行波束的时间起始至当前时刻。在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备接收来自网络设备的用于指示第二时间段的指示信息;在又一种可能的实施方式中,第二时间段为预定义的。
在一种可能的实施方式中,用于指示第二时间段的指示信息承载于系统消息、RRC层的消息、DCI和MAC CE中的一项。如此,可以提高方案的灵活性。
在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备根据第三预设规则确定出的下行波束与目标下行波束相同,包括:终端设备处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态,终端设备接收网络设备发送的下行参考信号;终端设备对下行参考信号进行测量得到测量结果;终端设备根据下行参考信号的测量结果,确定质量最好的M个波束与目标下行波束中的M个波束相同,M为正整数。该实施方式中,在一种可能的实施方式中,目标下行波束包括M个波束。如此,可以在一定程度上说明最优的几个下行波束仍旧未发生变化,因此目标下行波束被更新的几率较小。
在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备接收来自网络设备的资源配置信息之前,还包括:终端设备向网络设备发送第一请求,第一请求用于请求资源配置信息。
如此,一方面,使得网络设备准确地获知终端设备的需求,以便网络设备可以更好地为终端设备配置资源配置信息(信息更为准确),另一方面,终端设备主动触发网络设备为其配置资源,避免网络设备在不了解终端设备需求的情况下,为终端设备配置不需要的资源配置,使得配置更加灵活,节省信令开销。
在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备接收来自网络设备的资源配置信息之前,还包括:终端设备向网络设备发送第五指示信息、第六指示信息和第七指示信息中的至少一项。在 一种可能的实施方式中,第五指示信息用于指示终端设备支持在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态进行数据传输。在一种可能的实施方式中,第六指示信息用于指示终端设备支持在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态发送上行参考信号。在一种可能的实施方式中,第七指示信息用于指示终端设备支持在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态测量下行参考信号。在一种可能的实施方式中,第五指示信息、第六指示信息和第七指示信息中的至少一项承载于第一请求中。
如此,使得网络设备准确地获知终端设备的需求,以便网络设备可以更好地为终端设备配置资源配置信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备与网络设备进行数据传输之前,还包括:确定满足以下条件中的至少一项:
接收来自网络设备的第八指示信息;或者,接收来自网络设备的第九指示信息和第十指示信息中的至少一项;
当前待发送业务数据包的大小不大于终端设备对应的最大支持传输数据块大小。
在一种可能的实施方式中,第八指示信息用于指示网络设备对应的小区支持终端设备通过预配置资源进行数据传输。在一种可能的实施方式中,第九指示信息用于指示:在终端设备通过网络设备连接到5G核心网的情况下,网络设备支持终端设备通过预配置资源进行数据传输。在一种可能的实施方式中,第十指示信息用于指示:在终端设备通过网络设备连接到EPC的情况下,网络设备支持终端设备通过预配置资源进行数据传输。如此,一方面可以使终端设备明确网络设备的能力,另一方面当在进行数据传输之前,若判断待发送业务数据包满足要求,再根据资源配置信息传输数据,可以提高数据传输的成功率。
在一种可能的实施方式中,第八指示信息、第九指示信息和第十指示信息中的至少一项承载于系统消息。如此,可以更加兼容现有技术。
在一种可能的实施方式中,还包括:当终端设备处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态,终端设备根据上行参考信号的配置信息,向网络设备发送上行参考信号。如此,可以使网络设备基于上行参考信号确定目标上行波束,从而进行目标上行波束更新。
在一种可能的实施方式中,根据上行参考信号的配置信息,向网络设备发送上行参考信号之后,还包括:终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一消息;第一消息包括第三指示信息、资源配置信息的标识和第三指示信息的生效时间中的至少一项。
在一种可能的实施方式中,第一消息为DCI、MAC CE和RRC消息中的至少一项。
在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备根据上行参考信号的配置信息,向网络设备发送上行参考信号之前,还包括:终端设备接收来自网络设备的用于指示上行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。在又一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备根据第四预设规则,确定出上行参考信号的配置信息。如此,终端设备可以根据多种方式确定上行参考信号的配置信息。对于网络设备指示上行参考信号的配置信息,使得配置信息的选择更加灵活性,对于终端设备根据预设规则确定上行参考信号的配置信息,节省基站指示的信令开销,实现简单,且避免了终端设备选择上行参考信号的配置信息的行为不清楚的问题。
在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息包括用于指示上行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备根据第四预设规则,确定出上行参考信号的配置信息,包括:终端设备确定处于连接态时使用的上行参考信号的配置信息为:上行参考信 号的配置信息。
如此,一方面可以省去网络设备指示上行参考信号的配置信息的信令,另一方面,该方案确定出的上行参考信号的配置信息可以提高发送上行参考信号的成功率。
在一种可能的实施方式中,当终端设备处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态,终端设备根据下行参考信号的配置信息,对网络设备发送的下行参考信号进行测量,得到测量结果;终端设备向网络设备发送用于指示测量结果的指示信息;终端设备根据资源配置信息接收网络设备发送的第二消息;第二消息包括第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示更新后的目标下行波束。如此,网络设备可以为RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态的终端设备指示更新后的目标下行波束,从而提高数据传输的成功率,减少终端设备和网络设备的能耗。
在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备向网络设备上报用于指示测量结果的指示信息,包括:终端设备根据测量结果和第五预设规则,确定出M个候选下行波束;M为正整数;终端设备向网络设备发送第十一指示信息,第十一指示信息用于指示M个候选下行波束,更新后的目标下行波束为M个候选下行波束中的一个。
在一种可能的实施方式中,M不大于N,N为网络设备配置的终端设备需上报的候选下行波束的数量。
如此,通过配置N,可以提供基站控制灵活性,避免UE上报太多没必要的候选波束而导致浪费资源,另一方面,也可以避免UE上报过少的候选波束而影响基站选择目标波束的准确性。
在一种可能的实施方式中,第五预设规则包括以下至少一项:M个候选下行波束中的候选下行波束包括:测量结果中信号质量不小于第一门限的下行波束;根据信号质量从高到低对K个下行波束排序,M个候选下行波束为K个下行波束中的前M个下行波束,K为大于M的整数,K个下行波束中的每个下行波束的信号质量不小于第一门限。
如此,通过基站指示第一门限,控制UE上报候选波束,避免UE上报太多没必要的候选波束而导致浪费资源,另一方面,也可以避免UE上报过少的候选波束而影响基站选择目标波束的准确性。
在一种可能的实施方式中,第二消息还包括:资源配置信息的标识和第四指示信息的生效时间中的至少一项。当第二消息包括资源配置信息的标识,则终端设备可以更加容易确定出网络设备指示的更新后的目标下行波束对应的资源配置信息。
如此,当终端设备配置有多种资源配置信息的时候,可以更加容易区分。当第二消息包括第四指示信息的生效时间时,可以进一步提高方案的可控性。
在一种可能的实施方式中,第二消息为DCI、MAC CE和RRC消息中的至少一项。如此,可以更加兼容现有技术。
在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备根据下行参考信号的配置信息,对网络设备发送的下行参考信号进行测量之前,还包括:终端设备接收来自网络设备的用于指示下行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。在又一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备根据第六预设规则,确定出下行参考信号的配置信息,确定下行参考信号的配置信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息包括用于指示下行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。如此可以提高与现有技术的兼容性。
在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备根据第六预设规则,确定出下行参考信号的配置信息,包括:终端设备确定处于连接态时使用的下行参考信号的配置信息为:下行参考信 号的配置信息。
如此,一方面可以省去网络设备指示下行参考信号的配置信息的信令,另一方面,该方案确定出的下行参考信号的配置信息可以提高发送下行参考信号的成功率。
在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息包括:资源配置信息的标识。在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备接收来自网络设备的资源配置信息之后,还包括:终端设备向网络设备发送确认消息;确认消息中承载资源配置信息的标识。
如此,可以告知网络设备终端设备已成功接收到了该资源配置信息,避免因终端设备和网络设备对资源配置信息使用的理解不一致,导致使用资源配置信息进行数据传输失败。
第二方面,本申请实施例提供一种数据传输方法,该方法中,网络设备向终端设备发送资源配置信息;网络设备确定目标波束,目标波束包括目标上行波束和目标下行波束中的至少一个;网络设备根据资源配置信息,使用目标波束与处于无线接入控制RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态的终端设备进行数据传输。
如此,终端设备处于RRC非激活态或RRC空闲态的情况下,由终端设备来确定目标波束,从而可以通过对终端设备行为进行规范,可以明确终端设备使用预配置资源时所使用的上行波束和/或下行波束,可以避免因波束不准确而导致终端设备进行数据传输失败的问题,此外,终端设备可以通过预先获取的资源配置信息所对应的资源进行数据传输,减少终端设备在传输数据时进入RRC连接态获取资源配置信息带来的时延和信令开销。
在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息承载于RRC连接释放消息、RRC释放消息、RRC连接恢复消息和RRC恢复消息中的一项。在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息承载于RRC连接释放消息。在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备可以通过随机接入过程,或者在连接态下获取资源配置信息,从而在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态使用该资源配置信息。
如此,一方面,由网络侧来指示资源配置信息,可以使资源配置更加灵活,另一方面,在现有的信令中携带资源配置信息,更好地兼容现有技术。
在一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备确定目标波束之后,还包括:网络设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示目标上行波束。
如此,一方面,由网络设备来指示目标上行波束,明确了终端设备在使用资源配置信息与网络设备进行数据传输时所使用的上行波束,另一方面,采用网络侧指示的方式,可以使得目标上行波束的选择更加灵活。
在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息包括第一指示信息。如此,一方面,可以节省信令开销,另一方面,可以进一步兼容现有技术。
在一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备确定目标波束,包括:网络设备根据第一预设规则,确定目标上行波束。如此,网络设备可以根据预设的规则为处于RRC空闲态和RRC非连接态的终端设备指定目标上行波束,从而提高数据传输的成功率,节省终端设备和网络设备的功耗。在一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备确定目标波束,包括:网络设备确定在RRC连接态最后一次传输PUSCH时所使用的上行波束为目标上行波束。如此,由网络设备来确定目标上行波束,从而可以根据该目标上行波束的信息接收上行数据,避免终端设备确定上行波束不清楚的问题。
在一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备确定目标波束之后,还包括:网络设备向终端设备发送第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示目标下行波束。如此,一方面,由网络设备 来指示目标下行波束,明确了终端设备在使用资源配置信息与网络设备进行数据传输时所使用的下行波束,另一方面,采用网络侧指示的方式,可以使得目标下行波束的选择更加灵活。
在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息包括第二指示信息。如此,一方面,可以节省信令开销,另一方面,可以进一步兼容现有技术。
在一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备确定目标波束,包括:网络设备根据第二预设规则,确定目标下行波束。在一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备根据第二预设规则,确定目标下行波束,包括:网络设备确定在RRC连接态最后一次监听物理下行控制信道PDCCH时机所在的控制资源集合对应的下行波束为:目标下行波束。在又一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备确定预设标识的控制资源集合对应的下行波束为目标下行波束。在一种可能的实施方式中,预设标识的控制资源集合为标识0的控制资源集合。如此,由网络设备来确定目标下行波束,从而通过对网络设备的行为进行规范,明确了网络设备与终端设备进行数据传输时所使用的下行波束,可以避免网络设备和终端设备确定下行波束不清楚的问题。
在一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备向终端设备发送资源配置信息之前,还包括:网络设备接收来自终端设备的第一请求,第一请求用于请求资源配置信息。如此,一方面,使得网络设备准确地获知终端设备的需求,以便网络设备可以更好地为终端设备配置资源配置信息(信息更为准确),另一方面,终端设备主动触发网络设备为其配置资源,避免网络设备在不了解终端设备需求的情况下,为终端设备配置不需要的资源配置,使得配置更加灵活,节省信令开销。
在一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备向终端设备发送资源配置信息之前,还包括:网络设备接收来自终端设备的第五指示信息、第六指示信息和第七指示信息中的至少一项。其中,第五指示信息用于指示终端设备支持在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态进行数据传输。第六指示信息用于指示终端设备支持在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态发送上行参考信号。第七指示信息用于指示终端设备支持在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态测量下行参考信号。在一种可能的实施方式中,第五指示信息、第六指示信息和第七指示信息中的至少一项承载于第一请求中。如此,使得网络设备准确地获知终端设备的需求,以便网络设备可以更好地为终端设备配置资源配置信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备根据资源配置信息,使用目标波束与处于无线接入控制RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态的终端设备进行数据传输之前,还包括:网络设备向终端设备发送第八指示信息,第八指示信息用于指示网络设备对应的小区支持终端设备通过预配置资源进行数据传输。如此,可以使终端设备明确网络设备的能力,并在网络设备的能力与终端设备自身的需求匹配时,继而根据资源配置信息与网络设备进行数据传输。
在又一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备根据资源配置信息,使用目标波束与处于无线接入控制RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态的终端设备进行数据传输之前,还包括:网络设备向终端设备发送第九指示信息和/或第十指示信息。其中,第九指示信息用于指示在终端设备通过网络设备连接到5G核心网的情况下,网络设备支持终端设备通过预配置资源进行数据传输。第十指示信息用于指示在终端设备通过网络设备连接到演进型分组核心网EPC的情况下,网络设备支持终端设备通过预配置资源进行数据传输。如此,一方面可以使终端设备明确网络设备的能力,并在网络设备的能力与终端设备自身的需求匹配时,继而进行根据资源配置信息与网络设备进行数据传输。
在一种可能的实施方式中,第八指示信息、第九指示信息和第十指示信息中的至少一项承载于系统消息。如此,可以更加兼容现有技术。
在一种可能的实施方式中,方法还包括:网络设备接收来自处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态的终端设备的上行参考信号;网络设备根据上行参考信号确定出更新后的目标上行波束;网络设备向终端设备发送第一消息;第一消息包括第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示更新后的目标上行波束。如此,网络设备可以为RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态的终端设备指示更新后的目标上行波束,从而提高数据传输的成功率,减少终端设备和网络设备的能耗。
在一种可能的实施方式中,第一消息还包括资源配置信息的标识和第三指示信息的生效时间中的至少一项。当第一消息包括资源配置信息的标识,则终端设备可以更加容易确定出网络设备指示的更新后的目标上行波束对应的资源配置信息,如此,当终端设备配置有多种资源配置信息的时候,可以更加容易区分。当第一消息包括第三指示信息的生效时间时,可以进一步提高方案的可控性。
在一种可能的实施方式中,第一消息为DCI、MAC CE和RRC消息中的至少一项。如此,可以更加兼容现有技术。
在一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备接收来自处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态的终端设备的上行参考信号之前,还包括:网络设备向终端设备发送用于指示上行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息包括用于指示上行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。如此,可以更加兼容现有技术。
在一种可能的实施方式中,方法还包括:网络设备确定下行参考信号的配置信息,网络设备根据下行参考信号的配置信息,向终端设备发送下行参考信号,网络设备接收终端设备发送的用于指示测量结果的指示信息,网络设备根据用于指示测量结果的指示信息,确定出更新后的目标下行波束,网络设备向终端设备发送第二消息;第二消息包括第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示更新后的目标下行波束。如此,网络设备可以为RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态的终端设备指示更新后的目标下行波束,从而提高数据传输的成功率,减少终端设备和网络设备的能耗。
在一种可能的实施方式中,第二消息还包括:资源配置信息的标识和第四指示信息的生效时间中的至少一项。当第二消息包括资源配置信息的标识,则终端设备可以更加容易确定出网络设备指示的更新后的目标下行波束对应的资源配置信息,如此,当终端设备配置有多种资源配置信息的时候,可以更加容易区分。当第二消息包括第四指示信息的生效时间时,可以进一步提高方案的可控性。
在一种可能的实施方式中,第二消息为DCI、MAC CE和RRC消息中的至少一项。
在一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备确定下行参考信号的配置信息之后,还包括:网络设备向终端设备发送下行参考信号的配置信息。对于网络设备指示下行参考信号的配置信息,使得配置信息的选择更加灵活性,对于终端设备根据预设规则确定下行参考信号的配置信息,节省基站指示的信令开销,实现简单,且避免了终端设备选择下行参考信号的配置信息的行为不清楚的问题。
在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息包括用于指示下行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息包括:资源配置信息的标识。在一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备向终端设备发送资源配置信息之后,还包括:网络设备接收终端设备发送的确认消息;确认消息中承载资源配置信息的标识。
如此,可以告知网络设备终端设备已成功接收到了该资源配置信息,避免因终端设备和网络设备对资源配置信息使用的理解不一致,导致使用资源配置信息进行数据传输失败。
第三方面,提供一种终端设备,包括处理器和收发器。收发器,用于接收来自网络设备的资源配置信息。处理器,用于确定目标波束,在终端设备处于无线接入控制RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态的情况下,根据资源配置信息,使用目标波束通过收发器与网络设备进行数据传输,目标波束包括目标上行波束和目标下行波束中的至少一个。
在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息承载于RRC连接释放消息、RRC释放消息、RRC连接恢复消息和RRC恢复消息中的一项。
在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器,具体用于:根据通过收发器接收到的来自网络设备的第一指示信息确定目标波束;第一指示信息用于指示目标上行波束。
在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息包括第一指示信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器,具体用于根据第一预设规则,确定目标上行波束。
在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器,具体用于:确定在RRC连接态最后一次传输PUSCH时所使用的上行波束为目标上行波束。
在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器,具体用于:根据通过收发器接收到的来自网络设备的第二指示信息;第二指示信息用于指示目标下行波束。
在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器,具体用于:根据第二预设规则,确定目标下行波束。
在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息包括第二指示信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器,具体用于:确定在RRC连接态最后一次监听物理下行控制信道PDCCH时机所在的控制资源集合对应的下行波束为:目标下行波束。
在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器,具体用于:确定预设标识的控制资源集合对应的下行波束为目标下行波束。
在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器在通过收发器与网络设备之间进行数据传输之前,还用于执行以下至少一项:确定目标波束有效;确定定时提前TA有效。
在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器,具体用于在确定满足以下至少一项时,确定定时提前TA有效:定时提前TA有效的定时器处于运行状态;自前一次定时提前TA有效起,测得的服务小区参考信号接收功率RSRP增加量不大于第一阈值;自前一次定时提前TA有效起,测得的服务小区参考信号接收功率RSRP减少量不大于第二阈值;终端设备当前所处的位置属于预设的定时提前TA有效区域内。
在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器,还用于:确定在第一时间段内未通过收发器收到第三指示信息,确定目标上行波束有效;第三指示信息用于指示更新后的目标上行波束。
在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器,具体用于根据以下至少一项,确定目标下行波束有效:根据第三预设规则确定出的下行波束与目标下行波束相同;确定在第二时间段内未通过收发器收到第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示更新后的目标下行波束。
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发器,还用于:接收网络设备发送的下行参考信号;处理器,具体用于:对下行参考信号进行测量得到测量结果;终端设备根据下行参考信号的 测量结果,确定质量最好的M个波束与目标下行波束中的M个波束相同,M为正整数。
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发器,还用于:向网络设备发送第一请求,第一请求用于请求资源配置信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发器,还用于:向网络设备发送第五指示信息、第六指示信息和第七指示信息中的至少一项;其中,第五指示信息用于指示终端设备支持在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态进行数据传输;第六指示信息用于指示终端设备支持在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态发送上行参考信号;第七指示信息用于指示终端设备支持在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态测量下行参考信号。
在一种可能的实施方式中,第五指示信息、第六指示信息和第七指示信息中的至少一项承载于第一请求中。
在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器在通过收发器与网络设备进行数据传输之前,还用于确定满足:通过收发器接收来自网络设备的第八指示信息;或者,通过收发器接收来自网络设备的第九指示信息和第十指示信息中的至少一项。
在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器在通过收发器与网络设备进行数据传输之前,还用于确定满足:当前待发送业务数据包的大小不大于终端设备对应的最大支持传输数据块大小。
在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器在通过收发器与网络设备进行数据传输之前,还用于确定满足:当前待发送业务数据包的大小不大于终端设备对应的最大支持传输数据块大小。且还在通过收发器与网络设备进行数据传输之前确定满足:通过收发器接收来自网络设备的第八指示信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器在通过收发器与网络设备进行数据传输之前,还用于确定满足:当前待发送业务数据包的大小不大于终端设备对应的最大支持传输数据块大小。且还在通过收发器与网络设备进行数据传输之前确定满足:通过收发器接收来自网络设备的第九指示信息和第十指示信息中的至少一项。
在一种可能的实施方式中,第八指示信息用于指示网络设备对应的小区支持终端设备通过预配置资源进行数据传输;第九指示信息用于指示:在终端设备通过网络设备连接到5G核心网的情况下,网络设备支持终端设备通过预配置资源进行数据传输;第十指示信息用于指示:在终端设备通过网络设备连接到演进型分组核心网EPC的情况下,网络设备支持终端设备通过预配置资源进行数据传输。
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发器,还用于:当终端设备处于无线接入控制RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态,根据上行参考信号的配置信息,向网络设备发送上行参考信号。
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发器,还用于:接收来自网络设备的第一消息;第一消息包括第三指示信息、资源配置信息的标识和第三指示信息的生效时间中的至少一项。
在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器,还用于:通过收发器接收来自网络设备的用于指示上行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器,还用于:根据第四预设规则,确定出上行参考信号的配置信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息包括用于指示上行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器,具体用于:确定处于连接态时使用的上行参考信 号的配置信息为:上行参考信号的配置信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器,还用于:当终端设备处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态,根据下行参考信号的配置信息,对网络设备发送的下行参考信号进行测量,得到测量结果;通过收发器向网络设备发送用于指示测量结果的指示信息;根据资源配置信息通过收发器接收网络设备发送的第二消息;第二消息包括第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示更新后的目标下行波束。
在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器,还用于:根据测量结果和第五预设规则,确定出M个候选下行波束;M为正整数;收发器,还用于:向网络设备发送第十一指示信息,第十一指示信息用于指示M个候选下行波束,更新后的目标下行波束为M个候选下行波束中的一个。
在一种可能的实施方式中,M不大于N,N为网络设备配置的终端设备需上报的候选下行波束的数量。
在一种可能的实施方式中,第五预设规则包括以下至少一项:M个候选下行波束中的候选下行波束包括:测量结果中信号质量不小于第一门限的下行波束;根据信号质量从高到低对K个下行波束排序,M个候选下行波束为K个下行波束中的前M个下行波束,K为大于M的整数,K个下行波束中的每个下行波束的信号质量不小于第一门限。
在一种可能的实施方式中,第二消息还包括:资源配置信息的标识和第四指示信息的生效时间中的至少一项。
在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器,还用于:根据通过收发器接收到的来自网络设备的用于指示下行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息,确定下行参考信号的配置信息;或者;根据第六预设规则,确定出下行参考信号的配置信息,确定下行参考信号的配置信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器,具体用于:确定处于连接态时使用的下行参考信号的配置信息为:下行参考信号的配置信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息包括:资源配置信息的标识。
第四方面,提供一种网络设备,包括收发器和处理器。收发器,用于向终端设备发送资源配置信息。处理器,用于确定目标波束,目标波束包括目标上行波束和目标下行波束中的至少一个;根据资源配置信息,使用目标波束与处于无线接入控制RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态的终端设备通过收发器进行数据传输。
在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息承载于RRC连接释放消息、RRC释放消息、RRC连接恢复消息和RRC恢复消息中的一项。
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发器,还用于:向终端设备发送第一指示信息和第二指示信息中的一项或两项,第一指示信息用于指示目标上行波束,第二指示信息用于指示目标下行波束。
在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息包括第一指示信息和第二指示信息中的一项或两项。
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发器,还用于:接收来自终端设备的第一请求,第一请求用于请求资源配置信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发器,还用于:接收来自终端设备的第五指示信息、第六指示信息和第七指示信息中的至少一项;其中,第五指示信息用于指示终端设备支持在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态进行数据传输;第六指示信息用于指示终端设备支持在RRC 空闲态或RRC非激活态发送上行参考信号;第七指示信息用于指示终端设备支持在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态测量下行参考信号。
在一种可能的实施方式中,第五指示信息、第六指示信息和第七指示信息中的至少一项承载于第一请求中。
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发器,还用于:向终端设备发送第八指示信息,第八指示信息用于指示网络设备对应的小区支持终端设备通过预配置资源进行数据传输。
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发器,还用于:向终端设备发送第九指示信息和/或第十指示信息。其中,第九指示信息用于指示在终端设备通过网络设备连接到5G核心网的情况下,网络设备支持终端设备通过预配置资源进行数据传输;第十指示信息用于指示在终端设备通过网络设备连接到演进型分组核心网EPC的情况下,网络设备支持终端设备通过预配置资源进行数据传输。
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发器,还用于:接收来自处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态的终端设备的上行参考信号;处理器,还用于:根据上行参考信号确定出更新后的目标上行波束;通过收发器向终端设备发送第一消息;第一消息包括第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示更新后的目标上行波束。
在一种可能的实施方式中,第一消息还包括资源配置信息的标识和第三指示信息的生效时间中的至少一项。
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发器,还用于:向终端设备发送用于指示上行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息包括用于指示上行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器,还用于:确定下行参考信号的配置信息;根据下行参考信号的配置信息,通过收发器向终端设备发送下行参考信号;根据用于指示测量结果的指示信息,确定出更新后的目标下行波束;收发器,还用于:接收终端设备发送的用于指示测量结果的指示信息;向终端设备发送第二消息;第二消息包括第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示更新后的目标下行波束。
在一种可能的实施方式中,第二消息还包括:资源配置信息的标识和第四指示信息的生效时间中的至少一项。
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发器,还用于:向终端设备发送用于指示下行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息包括用于指示下行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息包括:资源配置信息的标识。
相应于第一方面至第二方面任一种通信方法,本申请还提供了一种通信装置。通信装置可以是以无线方式进行数据传输的任意一种发送端的设备或接收端的设备。例如,通信芯片、终端设备、或者网络设备(例如基站等)。在通信过程中,发送端的设备和接收端的设备是相对的。在某些通信过程中,通信装置可以作为上述网络设备或可用于网络设备的通信芯片;在某些通信过程中,通信装置可以作为上述终端设备或可用于终端设备的通信芯片。
第五方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括通信单元和处理单元,以执行上述第一方面至 第二方面任一种通信方法中的任一种实施方式。通信单元用于执行与发送和接收相关的功能。可选地,通信单元包括接收单元和发送单元。在一种设计中,通信装置为通信芯片,通信单元可以为通信芯片的输入输出电路或者端口。
在另一种设计中,通信单元可以为发射器和接收器,或者通信单元为发射机和接收机。
可选的,通信装置还包括可用于执行上述第一方面至第二方面任一种通信方法中的任一种实施方式的各个模块。
第六方面,提供了一种通信装置,该通信装置为上述终端设备或网络设备。包括处理器和存储器。可选的,还包括收发器,该存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令,该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序或指令,当处理器执行存储器中的计算机程序或指令时,使得该通信装置执行上述第一方面至第二方面任一种通信方法中的任一种实施方式。
可选的,处理器为一个或多个,存储器为一个或多个。
可选的,存储器可以与处理器集成在一起,或者存储器与处理器分离设置。
可选的,收发器中可以包括,发射机(发射器)和接收机(接收器)。
第七方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合,可用于执行第一方面至第二方面任一方面,以及第一方面至第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。可选地,该通信装置还包括存储器。可选地,该通信装置还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口耦合。
在一种实现方式中,该通信装置为终端设备。当该通信装置为终端设备时,通信接口可以是收发器,或,输入/输出接口。可选地,收发器可以为收发电路。可选地,输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。
在另一种实现方式中,该通信装置为网络设备。当该通信装置为网络设备时,通信接口可以是收发器,或,输入/输出接口。可选地,收发器可以为收发电路。可选地,输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。
在又一种实现方式中,该通信装置为芯片或芯片系统。当该通信装置为芯片或芯片系统时,通信接口可以是该芯片或芯片系统上的输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等。处理器也可以体现为处理电路或逻辑电路。
第八方面,提供了一种系统,系统包括上述终端设备和网络设备。
第九方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序(也可以称为代码,或指令),当计算机程序被运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法,或者使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第二方面任一种实现方式中的方法。
第十方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,计算机可读介质存储有计算机程序(也可以称为代码,或指令)当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法,或者使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第二方面任一种实现方式中的方法。
第十一方面,提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统可以包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合,可用于执行第一方面至第二方面中任一方面,以及第一方面至第二方面中任一方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。可选地,该芯片系统还包括存储器。存储器,用于存储计算机程序(也可以称为代码,或指令)。处理器,用于从存储器调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有芯片系统的设备执行第一方面至第二方面中任一方面,以及第一方面至第二方 面中任一方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第十二方面,提供了一种处理装置,包括:输入电路、输出电路和处理电路。处理电路用于通过输入电路接收信号,并通过输出电路发射信号,使得第一方面至第二方面任一方面,以及第一方面至第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法被实现。
在具体实现过程中,上述处理装置可以为芯片,输入电路可以为输入管脚,输出电路可以为输出管脚,处理电路可以为晶体管、门电路、触发器和各种逻辑电路等。输入电路所接收的输入的信号可以是由例如但不限于接收器接收并输入的,输出电路所输出的信号可以是例如但不限于输出给发射器并由发射器发射的,且输入电路和输出电路可以是同一电路,该电路在不同的时刻分别用作输入电路和输出电路。本申请实施例对处理器及各种电路的具体实现方式不做限定。
图1a为本申请实施例适用的一种通信系统架构示意图;
图1b为本申请实施例适用的又一种通信系统架构示意图;
图1c为本申请实施例适用的又一种通信系统架构示意图;
图1d为本申请实施例适用的又一种通信系统架构示意图;
图1e为本申请实施例适用的又一种通信系统架构示意图;
图2a为本申请实施例提供的一种数据传输方法的流程示意图;
图2b为本申请实施例提供的另一种数据传输方法的流程示意图;
图2c为本申请实施例提供的一种定时提前TA有效区域的示意图;
图2d为本申请实施例提供的另一种数据传输方法的流程示意图;
图2e为本申请实施例提供的另一种数据传输方法的流程示意图;
图2f为本申请实施例提供的一种信令的结构示意图;
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图;
图4为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置的结构示意图;
图5为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置的结构示意图。
下面将结合附图,对本申请实施例进行详细描述,显然,所描述的实施例仅仅是本发明一部分实施例,而不是全部的实施例。
图1a示例性示出本申请实施例适用的一种通信系统架构示意图。如图1a所示,终端设备130可接入到无线网络,以通过无线网络获取外网(例如因特网)的服务,或者通过无线网络与其它设备通信,如可以与其它终端设备通信。该无线网络包括无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)设备110和核心网(core network,CN)设备120,其中RAN设备110可以用于将终端设备130接入到无线网络,CN设备120用于对终端设备进行管理并提供与外网通信的网关。应理解,图1a所示的通信系统中各个设备的数量仅作为示意,本申请实施例并不限于此,实际应用中在通信系统中还可以包括更多的终端设备130、更多的RAN设备110,还可以包括其它设备。
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:全球移动通讯(Global System of Mobile Communication,GSM)系统、码分多址(Code Division Multiple Access, CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access,WCDMA)通用分组无线业务(General Packet Radio Service,GPRS)系统、长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(Frequency Division Duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(Time Division Duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信系统(Universal Mobile Telecommunication System,UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access,WiMAX)通信系统,以及5G通信系统等。
示例性地,图1a所示意的网络架构还可适用于公共陆上移动网(Public Land Mobile Network,PLMN)或者也可以适用于非地面网络(Non-Terrestrial Network,NTN),NTN可以包括卫星通信系统、高空平台(high altitude platform station,HAPS)通信系统或者其它非地面的通信系统。
图1b为本申请实施例适用的又一种网络架构示意图。如图1b所示,该网络架构包括CN设备、RAN设备和终端设备。其中,RAN设备包括基带装置和射频装置,其中基带装置可以由一个节点实现,也可以由多个节点实现,射频装置可以从基带装置拉远独立实现,也可以集成在基带装置中,或者部分拉远部分集成在基带装置中。例如,在LTE通信系统中,RAN设备(eNB)包括基带装置和射频装置,其中射频装置可以相对于基带装置拉远布置,例如射频拉远单元(remote radio unit,RRU)相对于BBU拉远布置。
RAN设备和终端设备之间的通信遵循一定的协议层结构,例如控制面协议层结构可以包括无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)层、分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层、无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层和物理层等协议层的功能;用户面协议层结构可以包括PDCP层、RLC层、MAC层和物理层等协议层的功能;在一种可能的实现中,PDCP层之上还可以包括业务数据适配(service data Adaptation protocol,SDAP)层。
RAN设备可以由一个节点实现RRC、PDCP、RLC和MAC等协议层的功能,或者可以由多个节点实现这些协议层的功能。例如,在一种演进结构中,RAN设备可以包括集中式单元(Centralized Unit,CU)和分布式单元(Distributed Unit)DU,多个DU可以由一个CU集中控制。如图1b所示,CU和DU可以根据无线网络的协议层划分,例如PDCP层及以上协议层的功能设置在CU,PDCP以下的协议层,例如RLC层和MAC层等的功能设置在DU。
这种协议层的划分仅仅是一种举例,还可以在其它协议层划分,例如在RLC层划分,将RLC层及以上协议层的功能设置在CU,RLC层以下协议层的功能设置在DU;或者,在某个协议层中划分,例如将RLC层的部分功能和RLC层以上的协议层的功能设置在CU,将RLC层的剩余功能和RLC层以下的协议层的功能设置在DU。此外,也可以按其它方式划分,例如按时延划分,将处理时间需要满足时延要求的功能设置在DU,不需要满足该时延要求的功能设置在CU。
此外,射频装置可以拉远,不放在DU中,也可以集成在DU中,或者部分拉远部分集成在DU中,在此不作任何限制。
图1c为本申请实施例适用的又一种网络架构示意图。相对于图1b所示的网络架构,图1c中还可以将CU的控制面(CP)和用户面(UP)分离,分成不同实体来实现,分别为控制面(control plane,CP)CU实体(即CU-CP实体)和用户面(user plane,UP)CU实体(即CU-UP实体)。
在以上网络架构中,CU产生的信令可以通过DU发送给终端设备,或者终端设备产生的信令可以通过DU发送给CU。DU可以不对该信令进行解析而直接通过协议层封装而透传给终端设备或CU。以下实施例中如果涉及这种信令在DU和终端设备之间的传输,此时,DU对信令的发送或接收包括这种场景。例如,RRC或PDCP层的信令最终会处理为PHY层的信令发送给终端设备,或者,由接收到的PHY层的信令转变而来。在这种架构下,该RRC或PDCP层的信令,即也可以认为是由DU发送的,或者,由DU和射频装载发送的。
上述图1a、图1b或图1c所示意的网络架构可以适用于各种无线接入技术(radio access technology,RAT)的通信系统中,例如可以是LTE通信系统,也可以是5G(或者称为新无线(new radio,NR))通信系统,也可以是LTE通信系统与5G通信系统之间的过渡系统,该过渡系统也可以称为4.5G通信系统,当然也可以是未来的通信系统。本申请实施例描述的网络架构以及业务场景是为了更加清楚的说明本申请实施例的技术方案,并不构成对于本申请实施例提供的技术方案的限定,本领域普通技术人员可知,随着通信网络架构的演变和新业务场景的出现,本申请实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题,同样适用。
本申请以下实施例中的装置,根据其实现的功能,可以位于终端设备或网络设备。当采用以上CU-DU的结构时,网络设备可以为CU节点、或DU节点、或包括CU节点和DU节点的RAN设备。
示例性地,图1a所示意的网络架构可适用于PLMN或者也可以适用于NTN,NTN可以包括卫星通信系统、高空平台(high altitude platform station,HAPS)通信系统或者其它非地面的通信系统。
下面以图1a所示意的网络架构适用于卫星通信系统为例,描述两种可能的场景,分别称为场景1和场景2。
参见图1d,为本申请实施例场景1的网络架构示意图。如图1d所示,RAN设备110部署在卫星(比如近地轨道卫星)上为例,该种场景也可以称为再生负载(regenerative payload)。
参见图1e,为本申请实施例场景2的网络架构示意图。如图1e所示,RAN设备110部署在地面,终端设备130和RAN设备110通信时是由卫星转发信号,此种场景中,卫星相当于一个中继节点或转发器,该种场景也可以称为透明负载(transparent payload)。
下面对本申请实施例涉及到的术语以及相关技术进行相关介绍。
1、终端设备。
终端设备包括向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备,例如可以包括具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、或连接到无线调制解调器的处理设备。该终端设备可以经无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)与核心网进行通信,与RAN交换语音和/或数据。该终端设备可以包括用户设备(user equipment,UE)、无线终端设备、移动终端设备、设备到设备通信(device-to-device,D2D)终端设备、V2X终端设备、机器到机器/机器类通信(machine-to-machine/machine-type communications,M2M/MTC)终端设备、物联网(internet of things,IoT)终端设备、订户单元(subscriber unit)、订户站(subscriber station),移动站(mobile station)、远程站(remote station)、接入点(access point,AP)、远程终端(remote terminal)、接入终端(access terminal)、用户终端(user terminal)、用户代理(user agent)、 或用户装备(user device)等。例如,可以包括移动电话(或称为“蜂窝”电话),具有移动终端设备的计算机,便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的移动装置等。例如,个人通信业务(personal communication service,PCS)电话、无绳电话、会话发起协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)话机、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、等设备。还包括受限设备,例如功耗较低的设备,或存储能力有限的设备,或计算能力有限的设备等。例如包括条码、射频识别(radio frequency identification,RFID)、传感器、全球定位系统(global positioning system,GPS)、激光扫描器等信息传感设备。
2、网络设备。
网络设备,例如包括接入网(access network,AN)设备,例如基站(例如,接入点),可以是指接入网中在空口通过一个或多个小区与无线终端设备通信的设备。基站可用于将收到的互联网协议(Internet Protocol,IP)分组进行相互转换,作为终端设备与接入网的其余部分之间的路由器,其中接入网的其余部分可包括IP网络。RSU可以是支持V2X应用的固定基础设施实体,可以与支持V2X应用的其他实体交换消息。网络设备还可协调对空口的属性管理。例如,网络设备可以包括LTE系统或高级长期演进(long term evolution-advanced,LTE-A)中的演进型基站(NodeB或eNB或e-NodeB,evolutional Node B),或者也可以包括第五代移动通信技术(the 5
th generation,5G)新无线(new radio,NR)系统中的下一代节点B(next generation node B,gNB)或者也可以包括云接入网(cloud radio access network,Cloud RAN)系统中的集中式单元(centralized unit,CU)和分布式单元(distributed unit,DU),本申请实施例并不限定。
3、波束(beam)。
由于5G通信系统中将会采用更高的载波频率(例如,大于或等于6GHz),比如28GHz、38GHz、或者72GHz频段等,以实现更大带宽、更高传输速率的无线通信,从而会使得其发射的无线信号在空间传播过程中经历更加严重的衰落,甚至在接收端难以检测出该无线信号。因此,5G通信系统中将采用波束赋形(beamforming,BF)技术来获得具有良好方向性的波束,以提升天线增益,提高在发射方向上的功率。示例性地,在小于6GHz的载波频率上,也可以采用波束的方式,提高频谱空间复用率。
波束是一种通信资源,波束可以是宽波束,也可为窄波束,或其它类型的波束。形成波束的技术可以是波束成形技术或其它技术手段。波束成形技术可具体为数字波束成形技术、模拟波束成形技术、混合数字/模拟波束成形技术等。不同的波束可认为是不同的通信资源,通过不同的波束可发送相同的信息或不同的信息。波束包括发射波束和接收波束,发射波束可以是指信号经天线发射出去后在空间不同方向上形成的信号强度的分布,接收波束可以是指天线阵列对无线信号在空间不同方向上进行加强或削弱接收的分布。本申请实施例中,举个例子,网络设备通过发射波束x1发送信息,相应地,终端设备可通过接收波束x2接收到信息,此种情形下,发射波束x1和接收波束x2可以理解为一个波束对。需要说明的是,本申请实施例对发射波束和接收波束暂不做明确区分,上述发射波束x1和接收波束x2可以统称为波束x,如此可以理解为,网络设备通过波束x发送信息,相应地,终端设备可通过波束x接收信息。
波束在协议中可以通过各种信号的标识来表示,例如同步信号广播信道块(synchronous signal/physical broadcast channel block,SS/PBCH block,也可以简称为SSB) 的索引。也就是说,波束与SSB之间存在对应关系。
可选的,可以将具有相同或者类似通信特征的多个波束视为一个波束,一个波束可包括一个或多个天线端口,用于传输数据信道、控制信道和探测信号等。例如,发送波束可以是指信号经天线发射出去后在空间不同方向上形成的信号强度分布,接收波束可以是指从天线上接收到的无线信号在空间不同方向上的信号强度分布。可以理解的是,形成一个波束的一个或多个天线端口也可以看作是一个天线端口集,波束还可以称为空域滤波器(spatial filer),发射波束也可称为空域发射滤波器,接收波束也可称为空域接收滤波器。
4、波束配置信息。
波束配置信息可以包括上行参考信号的配置信息、下行参考信号的配置信息等。
波束配置信息可以是指用于波束管理的资源,又可以体现为用于计算和测量波束质量的资源。波束质量包括层一接收参考信号功率(layer 1 reference signal received power,L1-RSRP),层一接收参考信号质量(layer 1 reference signal received quality,L1-RSRQ)等。具体的,波束配置信息可以包括同步信号(synchronization signal,SS),同步信号块(synchronization signal block,SSB),同步广播信号块(SS/PBCH block)广播信道,广播信道解调参考信号,跟踪参考信号,下行信道测量参考信号,下行控制信道解调参考信号,下行共享信道解调参考信号,上行探测参考信号,上行随机接入信号等。
5、下行参考信号的配置信息。
下行参考信号可以是发送端提供给接收端的用于信道估计或者信道测量的一种信号,占用某些特定的时频资源。根据这些参考信号可以进行信道测量、信道估计、下行同步和辅助终端设备解调信息。这些下行参考信号通常具有如下特点:通常采用伪随机序列、离散地分布在时域上,相当于对信道的时频域特性进行抽样、参考信号分布越密集、则信道估计越精确,但开销越大,影响系统容量。
下行参考信号可以是解调参考信号DMRS(Demodulation Reference Signal)、相噪跟踪参考信号PT-RS(Phase Tracking Reference Signal)、信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS(Channel State Information Reference Signal),其中,CSI-RS又可以细分为:非零功率CSI-RS(NZP-CSI-RS,Non-Zero Power CSI-RS)、跟踪参考信号Tracking RS、零功率CSI-RS(Zero Power CSI-RS)和信道状态信息-干扰测量CSI-IM(CSI interference measurement)、同步信号和PBCH块(SSB,synchronization signal and PBCH block)。
不同的下行参考信号可以有不同的配置信息,下行参考信号的配置信息(也可以称为下行参考信号的配置)可以包括如下至少一种:参考信号测量配置、参考信号报告配置。其中:
参考信号测量配置包括如下至少一种:参考信号类型指示,参考信号的序列指示信息(如扰码ID)、参考信号对应的端口数指示、导频图案指示、频域特性指示信息、时域特性指示信息,其中,参考信号类型指示用于指示是哪种下行参考信号、导频图案指示用于指示导频资源图案、频域特性指示信息用于指示下行参考信号在频域上的分布,换句话说频域上哪些位置可以接收/发送下行参考信号,时域特性指示信息用于指示下行参考信号在时域上的分布,如指示发送周期和时域偏移指示。
参考信号报告配置包括如下至少一种:测量报告标识、载波指示、报告类型指示、报告量指示。
6、上行参考信号的配置信息。
上行参考信号可以为探测信号(SRS,Sounding Reference Signal),即通常说的上行Sounding信号,SRS主要用于上行信道质量的估计,从而用于上行调度、上行定时提前、上行波束管理等。
上行参考信号的配置信息(也可以称为上行参考信号的配置)可以包括如下至少一种:参考信号测量配置、参考信号报告配置。其中:
参考信号测量配置包括如下至少一种:参考信号类型指示,参考信号的序列指示信息(如扰码ID)、参考信号对应的端口数指示、导频图案指示、频域特性指示信息、时域特性指示信息,其中,参考信号类型指示用于指示是哪种上行参考信号、导频图案指示用于指示导频资源图案、频域特性指示信息用于指示上行参考信号在频域上的分布,换句话说频域上哪些位置可以接收/发送上行参考信号,时域特性指示信息用于指示上行参考信号在时域上的分布,如指示发送周期和时域偏移指示。
参考信号报告配置包括如下至少一种:测量报告标识、载波指示、报告类型指示、报告量指示。
7、用于指示波束的指示信息。
本申请实施例中提到目标波束,目标波束包括有目标上行波束和目标下行波束。本申请实施例中用于指示目标上行波束的指示信息称为第一指示信息,用于指示目标下行波束的指示信息称为第二指示信息。
本申请实施例中的“目标波束”、“目标上行波束”和“目标下行波束”中的“目标”仅仅是为了更容易理解该文内容,为了引用更清楚而起的名称。因此,“目标波束”也可以称为“波束”,“目标上行波束”也可以称为“上行波束”,目标下行波束也可以称为“下行波束”,“目标”二字不具有其他限定意义,仅仅是为了区分。第一指示信息和第二指示信息也可以统称为波束指示信息。或者可以说波束指示信息包括第一指示信息和/或第二指示信息。
波束指示信息可以用于指示传输所使用的波束,包括发送波束和接收波束中的至少一个。当数据的传输方向为从终端设备传输至网络设备,则本申请实施例中的上行波束可以称为发送波束,下行波束可以称为接收波束。当数据的传输方向为从网络设备发送至终端设备,则本申请实施例中的上行波束可以称为接收波束,下行波束可以称为发送波束。
波束指示信息可包括波束编号、波束配置信息编号,上行信号资源号,下行信号资源号、波束的绝对索引、波束的相对索引、波束的逻辑索引、波束对应的天线端口的索引、波束对应的天线端口组索引、波束对应的下行信号的索引、波束对应的下行同步信号块的时间索引、波束对连接(beam pair link,BPL)信息、波束对应的发送参数(Tx parameter)、波束对应的接收参数(Rx parameter)、波束对应的发送权重、波束对应的权重矩阵、波束对应的权重向量、波束对应的接收权重、波束对应的发送权重的索引、波束对应的权重矩阵的索引、波束对应的权重向量的索引、波束对应的接收权重的索引、波束对应的接收码本、波束对应的发送码本、波束对应的接收码本的索引、波束对应的发送码本的索引中的至少一种,下行信号包括同步信号、广播信道、广播信号解调信号、信道状态信息下行信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS)、小区专用参考信号(cell specific reference signal,CS-RS)、UE专用参考信号(user equipment specific reference signal,US-RS)、下行控制信道解调参考信号,下行数据信道解调参考信号,下行相位噪声跟踪信号中任意一种。上行信号包括中上行随机接入序列,上行探测参考信号,上行控制信道解调参考信 号,上行数据信道解调参考信号,上行相位噪声跟踪信号任意一种。可选的,网络设备还可以为频率资源组关联的波束中具有QCL关系的波束分配QCL标示符。
波束指示信息还可以体现为传输配置编号(transmission configuration index,TCI),TCI中可以包括多种参数,例如,小区编号,带宽部分编号,参考信号标识,同步信号块标识,QCL类型等。
8、终端设备的工作状态:终端设备的工作状态可以包括无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)空闲(RRC_IDLE)态、RRC非激活(Inactive)态和RRC连接(RRC_CONNECTED)态。其中,RRC空闲态可简称为空闲态,RRC非激活态可简称为非激活态,RRC连接态可简称为连接态。下面分别对这三种工作状态进行说明。
空闲态:终端设备经过初始随机接入过程接入网络设备后,网络设备可以存储该终端设备的设备参数,如果终端设备较长时间未与网络设备通信,网络设备便将存储的终端设备的设备参数删除,此时终端设备所处的状态即为空闲态。处于空闲态时,终端设备不存在RRC连接,可以进行小区选择和重选,监听寻呼信道以及跟踪区更新(tracking area update,TAU)。处于空闲态的终端设备如果需要与网络设备通信,则需要再次发起随机接入过程。
连接态:终端设备经过初始随机接入过程接入网络设备后,网络设备中可以存储该终端设备的设备参数,在此期间,终端设备可以与网络设备通信,此时终端设备所处的状态即为连接态。处于连接态时,终端设备可以收发数据,以及根据终端设备的活动性,可以通过非连续性接收(discontinuous reception,DRX)来节省空口资源和终端设备的电量。
非激活态:处于非激活态的终端设备与网络设备断开了RRC连接,不需要连续监听下行数据,从而达到与空闲态一样的省电效果,但处于非激活态的终端设备和网络设备均保存终端设备的上下文信息,当终端设备需要进入连接态时,网络设备可以基于保存的上下文信息配置非激活态的终端设备进入到连接态。
本申请实施例中的术语“系统”和“网络”可被互换使用。“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a,b,或c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,b,c,a-b,a-c,b-c,或a-b-c,其中a,b,c可以是单个,也可以是多个。
以及,除非有特别说明,本申请实施例提及“第一”、“第二”等序数词是用于对多个对象进行区分,不用于限定多个对象的顺序、时序、优先级或者重要程度。例如,第一指示信息、第二指示信息等,只是为了区分不同的指示信息,而并不是表示这两个指示信息的优先级或者重要程度等的不同。
基于上述内容,图2a示例性示出了本申请实施例提供一种数据传输方法的流程示意图,如图2a所示,该方法包括:
步骤201,网络设备向终端设备发送资源配置信息。
相对应地,终端设备接收来自网络设备的资源配置信息。
本申请实施例中的资源配置信息用于指示终端设备在处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态的情况下可以通过该资源配置信息进行数据传输。在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置 信息是网络设备为该终端设备提前配置的,因此可以将其称为“预配置”的资源配置信息,或者也可以称为资源配置信息所配置的资源的资源配置信息;可选地,资源配置信息是在终端设备处于RRC连接态时网络设备为该终端设备配置的,具体地,网络设备可以通过RRC消息、MAC CE或DCI向终端设备发送资源配置信息。
资源配置信息所配置的资源可以包括时域资源、频域资源、码域资源、空域资源中的至少一种,资源配置信息所配置的资源包括上行资源和/或下行资源。在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息中可以包括:PUSCH配置信息、PUCCH配置信息、PDCCH配置信息,以及终端设备无线网络临时标识(Radio Network Temporary Identifier,RNTI)(例如可以为pur-RNTI)、上行参考信号的配置信息、下行参考信号的配置信息、资源隐式释放指示、资源使用次数指示中的一项或多项。其中:
1)PUSCH配置信息用于指示终端设备发送上行数据时使用的资源配置信息,PUSCH配置信息可以包括如下至少一种:参考时域位置指示、时域分配信息、频域分配信息、天线端口信息、探测参考信号资源指示、传输块大小指示信息、重复类型指示信息、重复次数指示、功率控制参数信息。其中:
参考时域位置指示信息:用于指示PUSCH资源在时域的起始位置。可选地,此参考时域位置指示信息可以是通过一个绝对值指示。举个例子,绝对值指示可以是参考系统帧号(SFN,System Frame Number),相当于PUSCH资源在时域开始于参考SFN,相应地,UE通过此参考SFN确定PUSCH资源在时域的起始位置;或者此参考时域位置指示信息可以通过相对位置和偏移量指示,举个例子,基站可以指示一个参考点位置(e.g.参考SFN),然后再指示一个偏移量指示Offset,UE收到两个指示,根据参考点位置和偏移量指示信息确定PUSCH在时域的起始位置,一种可能的设计中,UE根据参考点位置和偏移量指示信息之和确定PUSCH在时域的起始位置;
时域分配信息:指示PUSCH资源在时域的分配信息;可选地,此分配信息包括如下至少一种:PUSCH资源在时域的起始位置、PUSCH资源在时域占用的长度(在时域持续的时长)中至少一种;
频域分配信息:指示PUSCH资源在频域的分配信息、或称PUSCH资源在频域的分布信息;可选地,此分配信息包括如下至少一种:频域起始位置信息、每个PUSCH时机占用的PRB个数、相邻PUSCH时机之间的间隔;跳频指示信息;其中,PUSCH时机,PUSCH时机指能够用来发送上行信息的PUSCH资源位置,PUSCH时机也可称为PUSCH机会;
天线端口信息:指示用于此PUSCH配置信息的天线端口个数;
探测参考信号资源指示:指示探测参考信号使用的资源信息;
传输块大小指示:指示使用PUSCH资源传输时对应的传输块大小;
重复类型指示信息:指示终端设备进行重复传输的方式,重复类型可以包括时隙间重复传输、时隙内重复传输中至少一种;可以理解,时隙间重复传输可以是通过多个连续的时隙进行重复方式、或者是通过多个不连续的时隙进行重复方式;可选地,如果是不连续的时隙进行重复,网络设备可以进一步指示不连续的两个时隙之间的间隔;时隙内重复是在同一个时隙内进行多次重复,而这多次重复可以是通过连续的多个符号进行重复、或者可以是通过不连续的多个符号进行重复,可选地,如果是不连续的多个符号进行重复,网络设备可以进一步指示不连续的两个符号之间的间隔;
重复次数指示信息:重复传输对应的重复次数,可选地,网络设备可以指示第一次重 复的起始位置,举个例子,如果重复类型指示信息指示时隙间重复传输,网络设备可以指示第一次重复传输的所在的时隙信息;如果重复类型指示信息指示时隙内重复,可以指示第一次重复传输所在的时隙信息、以及第一次重复传输位于该时隙中的位置信息,举个例子,网络设备可以指示第一次重复传输所在的时隙信息,以及第一次重复传输位于该时隙中的哪个符号。
功率控制参数信息:指示在此PUSCH上进行功率控制的参数;
资源隐式释放指示:指示终端设备确定释放PUSCH资源;此释放指示可以为次数指示或定时器指示,如果释放指示为次数指示,如指示个数N,当终端设备如果连续N次在可用的PUSCH资源上不发送数据,即连续N次未使用PUSCH资源与网络设备进行数据传输,则终端设备可以释放掉该资源配置信息,对应地,如果网络设备连续N次在为终端设备配置的资源上没有与该终端设备进行数据传输,网络设备可以隐式释放为此终端设备配置的资源配置信息;同理,如果释放指示次数为定时器指示,如指示定时器T,当终端设备在定时器T运行时间内,没有使用该资源配置信息和网络设备进行数据传输,则终端设备可以释放掉该资源配置信息,对应地,如果网络设备在T定时器T运行时间内,没有使用该资源配置信息和终端设备进行数据传输,网络设备可以释放掉该资源配置信息。
资源使用次数指示:指示终端设备可以使用该资源配置信息与网络设备进行数据传输的次数,举个例子,如果使用次数指示为1,则终端设备只能用该资源配置信息与网络设备进行一次数据传输;同理,如果使用次数为2,则终端设备可用该资源配置信息与网络设备进行两次数据传输;可以理解,当超过资源使用次数指示,终端设备仍有数据要发送时,终端设备可以触发随机接入过程。
2)PDCCH配置信息:用于指示终端设备监听网络设备发送控制信息时使用的资源配置信息,包括如下至少一种:搜索空间(search space)配置和控制资源集合(control resource set,CORESET),搜索空间和CORESET之间可以存在关联关系),其中,搜索空间和搜索空间关联的CORESET可以用于指示DCI对应的多个候选时频位置、无线网络临时标识、监听时间窗大小、监听时间窗起始位置,其中:
控制资源集合决定了传输DCI的频域资源,即DCI可以在控制资源集合对应的频域资源上传输,控制资源集合对应的频域资源可以包括多个资源块(RB,Resource Block)。
搜索空间决定了传输DCI的时域资源,搜索空间可以配置有一些时域信息,比如:周期(即检测搜索空间的时间间隔,单位可以为时隙);时隙偏移(即检测周期开始到实际检测搜索空间之间的时隙偏移量,且该时隙偏移量小于检测周期的取值);第一持续时间(通过duration参数配置,即连续检测搜索空间的时间,可以包括多个时隙,且包括的时隙数量小于检测周期的取值);时域起始位置(即每个时隙内,搜索空间关联的控制资源集合对应的时域起始位置)。
无线网络临时标识;用于终端设备监听PDCCH时使用的RNTI,如pur-RNTI;换句话说,此无线网络临时标识用于终端设备。
监听时间窗大小:用于指示终端设备在多长时间内监听PDCCH,可选地,此监听时间窗可以是以定时器的形式体现;
监听时间窗起始位置:用于终端设备确定监听时间窗起始位置,举个例子,如果网络设备指示监听时间窗起始位置为3个时隙、则终端在PUSCH资源上发完数据后,经过3个时隙启动监听时间窗,本发明中指示时间窗起始位置的数值、以及数值对应的时间单位 不做限制。
3)PUCCH配置信息包括如下至少一种:时域资源分配信息、频域资源分配信息、PUCCH格式信息、功率控制信息、HARQ反馈时序信息指示。其中:时域资源分配信息:指示PUCCH资源在时域的分配信息;可选地,此分配信息包括如下至少一种:时域资源所在起始符号、时域资源在时域占用的长度(在时域持续的时长);
频域分配信息:指示PUCCH资源在频域的分配信息、或称PUCCH资源在频域的分布信息;可选地,此分配信息包括如下至少一种:PUCCH资源在频域的起始位置信息、PUCCH在频域占用的资源个数(如PRB个数);
功率控制信息:指示根据PUCCH进行功率控制所使用的参数;
HARQ反馈时序信息指示:指示终端设备向网络设备发送HARQ反馈信息的时刻,换句话说,终端设备接收到网络设备发送的承载在PUSCH上的数据后,可以根据此信息指示,确定经过多长时间向网络设备反馈HARQ反馈信息。可选地,此HARQ反馈信息可以通过PUSCH或PUCCH发送。
在一种可能地实施方式中,终端设备可以根据资源配置信息中的PUSCH配置信息来发送上行数据,然后根据配置的无线网络临时标识(e.g.pur-RNTI)和PDCCH配置信息来接收调度信息,其中,调度信息可以包括如下至少一种:时域资源指示、频域资源指示、调制编码方式、新数据指示信息(通过此指示可判断是新传or重传)、功率控制命令指示、冗余版本指示、DCI格式指示、载波指示信息、BWP指示信息、物理资源块PRB捆绑(Physical Resource block)bundling大小、速率匹配指示(Rate matching indicator)信息、HARQ进程号指示、PUCCH资源指示信息、PDSCH和HARQ反馈之间的时序指示信息、天线端口指示、传输配置指示(TCI,Transmission configuration indication)、发送方式指示(包括单播、多播或广播)、目标上行波束指示信息、目标下行波束指示信息。接收调度信息时,可以是通过监听PDCCH,以接收调度信息。举个例子,终端设备在发送完上行数据后的一段时长(e.g.终端设备可根据监听时间窗起始位置确定此时长)后启动监听时间窗(此时间窗可以以定时器的形式出现),然后使用配置的无线网络临时标识来监听PDCCH。其中,该一段时长可以是X个时间单元,X可以为正整数。其中,一个时间单元可以是Y符号、Y时隙、Y子帧、Y毫秒、Y微秒或者其他时间粒度的单元Y可以为正整数。可选地,X可以是协议预定义,可以是网络设备为终端设备配置的。
上述步骤201中,可以是处于连接态的终端设备接收网络设备发送的资源配置信息。或者,在又一种可能的实施方式中,上述步骤201中,可以是终端设备在随机接入过程中接收网络设备发送的资源配置信息。在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息承载于RRC消息。在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息承载于RRC连接释放消息、RRC释放消息、RRC连接恢复消息和RRC恢复消息中的一项。在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息承载于RRC连接释放消息。在一种可能的实施方式中,RRC连接释放消息英文可以写为RRC Release。
可选地,资源配置信息还可以包括:资源配置信息的标识。在一种可能的实施方式中,在上述步骤201之后,终端设备向网络设备发送确认消息;确认消息中承载资源配置信息的标识,从而向网络设备指示终端设备已经成功接收该标识对应的资源配置信息。考虑可能会有多种类型的业务,终端设备可以为不同类型的业务请求不同的资源配置信息,网络设备配置资源配置信息与业务类型之间存在对应关系,当终端设备有多种类型的业务需要 发送时,可以根据此对应关系、以及待发送的业务对应的业务类型,确定使用的资源配置信息,然后根据此资源配置信息向网络设备发送此业务数据;可选地,资源配置信息与业务类型之间的对应关系可以是资源配置标识与业务标识之间的对应关系,此外,该对应关系可以是一对一、一对多、多对多、多对一;此发明中不作限制。
本申请实施例中,“承载”一词也可以用“包括”、“携带”替换,通常英文用“include”来表示。比如,本申请实施例中提到:“确认消息中承载资源配置信息”,也可以替换为“确认消息中包括资源配置信息”,也可以替换为“确认消息中携带资源配置信息”。
步骤202,终端设备确定目标波束,目标波束包括目标上行波束和目标下行波束中的至少一个。
1)下面介绍终端设备确定目标上行波束的方法。
在上述步骤202中,终端设备确定目标上行波束可以有多种实现方式,比如可以通过下述方式a1中第一指示信息进行指示的方式来确定,再比如,可以通过下述方式a2中的第一预设规则来确定。
方式a1,终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息,根据第一指示信息确定目标上行波束,其中第一指示信息用于指示目标上行波束。
对于方式a1,在一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备可以通过两条消息分别向终端设备发送第一指示信息和资源配置信息。或者,在又一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备可以通过一条消息发送第一指示信息和资源配置信息。
对于方式a1,一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息中包括第一指示信息,如此,当终端设备接收到资源配置信息时也可以获取第一指示信息。终端设备根据第一指示信息确定目标上行波束。
对于方式a1,一种可能的实现方式中,第一指示信息为上行波束索引(UL beam index),可以理解,终端设备根据上行波束索引、以及预先获取的上行波束索引和上行波束之间对应关系确定目标上行波束,其中,此对应关系可以是协议预设、或者是网络设备配置的,例如,网络设备通过系统消息、或RRC消息配置此对应关系。可选地,此第一指示信息承载在控制资源集合(Control resource set,CORESET)中。
方式a2,终端设备根据第一预设规则,确定目标上行波束。
对于方式a2,一种可能的实现方式中,当资源配置信息中可以不包括第一指示信息时,终端设备采用方式a2,反之,当资源配置信息中包括第一指示信息时,终端设备采用方式a1,换句话说,方式a1的使用优于方式a2。
对于方式a2,一种可能的第一预设规则的实现方式中,终端设备可以将自身在RRC连接态最后一次传输PUSCH时所使用的上行波束作为目标上行波束。又一种可能的第一预设规则的实现方式中,终端设备可以将前一次处于RRC连接态(前一次处于RRC连接态是指以当前时刻为起始的最近一次处于RRC连接态的情况)时所使用的上行波束作为目标上行波束,以便在终端设备通过资源配置信息所配置的资源向网络设备发送上行数据时,使用该目标上行波束。
本申请实施例中,终端设备根据第一指示信息或第一预设规则确定出的目标上行波束可以是一个波束,也可以是多个波束,具体个数本发明对此不做限制。
2)下面介绍终端设备确定目标下行波束的方法。
在上述步骤202中,当目标波束包括目标下行波束时,终端设备确定目标下行波束的方式可以有多种,比如可以通过下述方式b1中第二指示信息进行指示的方式来确定,再比如,可以通过下述方式b2中的第二预设规则来确定。
方式b1,终端设备接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息,终端设备根据第二指示信息确定目标下行波束,其中,第二指示信息用于指示目标下行波束。
其中,终端设备接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息的方式可以有多种,在一种可能的方式中,终端设备可以通过两条消息分别接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息和资源配置信息。或者,在又一种可能的方式中,终端设备可以通过一条消息接收第二指示信息和资源配置信息,可选地,资源配置信息可以包括第二指示信息。
对于方式b1,一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息中包括第二指示信息,如此,当终端设备接收到资源配置信息时也可以获取第二指示信息。终端设备根据第二指示信息确定目标下行波束。
对于方式b1,一种可能的实现方式中,第二指示信息为下行波束索引(DL beam index),可以理解,终端设备根据下行波束索引、以及预先获取的下行波束索引和下行波束之间对应关系确定目标下行波束,其中,此对应关系可以是协议预设、或者是网络设备配置的,例如,网络设备通过系统消息、或RRC消息配置此对应关系。可选地,此第二指示信息承载在控制资源集合(Control resource set,CORESET)中。
方式b2,终端设备根据第二预设规则,确定目标下行波束。
对于方式b2,一种可能的实现方式中,当资源配置信息中可以不包括第二指示信息时,终端设备采用方式b2,反之,当资源配置信息中包括第二指示信息时,终端设备采用方式b1,换句话说,方式b1的使用优于方式b2。
第二预设规则的具体实现方式有多种,下面结合示例1、示例2和示例3进行描述。
示例1,终端设备可以将前一次处于RRC连接态(前一次处于RRC连接态是指以当前时刻为起始的最近一次处于RRC连接态的情况)时所使用的下行波束作为目标下行波束,以便基于该目标下行波束接收网络设备通过资源配置信息所配置的资源发送的下行数据。
示例2,终端设备确定目标下行波束为:处于RRC连接态的终端设备最后一次监听物理下行控制信道(Physical Downlink Control Channel,PDCCH)时机(occasion)时所在的控制资源集合CORESET对应的下行波束。也可以理解为,终端设备确定在RRC连接态最后一次监听PDCCH时机所在的控制资源集合对应的下行波束为:目标下行波束。
示例3,终端设备确定预设标识的控制资源集合对应的下行波束为目标下行波束。一种可能的实现方式中,预设标识的控制资源集合为标识0的控制资源集合,也可以说,再该可能的实现方式中,目标下行波束包括CORESET#0对应的波束。
本申请实施例中,终端设备根据第二指示信息或第二预设规则确定出的目标下行波束可以是一个波束,也可以是多个波束,具体个数本发明对此不做限制。
在一种可能地实施方式中,网络设备确定目标波束,目标波束包括目标上行波束和/或目标下行波束。
1)下面介绍网络设备确定目标上行波束的方法。
网络设备确定目标波束的方式有多种,在一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备可以通过波束训练的方式确定出目标上行波束。
网络设备可以根据第一预设规则,确定目标上行波束。一种可能的第一预设规则的实现方式中,网络设备可以将终端设备在RRC连接态最后一次传输PUSCH时所使用的上行波束作为目标上行波束。又一种可能的第一预设规则的实现方式中,网络设备可以将前一次处于RRC连接态(前一次处于RRC连接态是指以当前时刻为起始的最近一次处于RRC连接态的情况)时所使用的上行波束作为目标上行波束,以便根据该目标上行波束接收终端设备通过资源配置信息所配置的资源向网络设备发送的上行数据。
本申请实施例中,网络设备确定出的目标上行波束可以是一个波束,也可以是多个波束,具体个数本发明不做限制。
2)下面介绍网络设备确定目标下行波束的方法。
网络设备确定目标波束的方式有多种,在一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备可以通过波束训练的方式确定出目标下行波束。
在又一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备可以根据第二预设规则,确定目标下行波束。
一种第二预设规则的可能的实现方式中,网络设备可以将前一次处于RRC连接态(前一次处于RRC连接态是指以当前时刻为起始的最近一次处于RRC连接态的情况)时所使用的下行波束作为目标下行波束,以便基于该目标下行波束向终端设备发送下行数据。又一种可能的第二预设规则的实施方式中,目标下行波束包括:处于RRC连接态的终端设备最后一次监听物理下行控制信道(Physical Downlink Control Channel,PDCCH)时机(occasion)时所在的控制资源集合CORESET对应的下行波束。又一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备将在RRC连接态最后一次监听PDCCH时机所在的控制资源集合对应的下行波束确定为目标下行波束。又一种第二预设规则的可能的实现方式中,终端设备确定预设标识的控制资源集合对应的下行波束为目标下行波束。一种可能的实现方式中,预设标识的控制资源集合为标识0的控制资源集合,也可以说,在该可能的实现方式中,目标下行波束包括:CORESET#0对应的波束。
又一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备可以根据终端设备上报的结果(上报的结果例如可以为终端设备选择出的候选下行波束)来确定目标下行波束,可选地,网络设备可以基于一定的算法或规则来确定目标下行波束,例如,网络设备可以从终端设备上报的候选波束中选取信号质量最好的下行波束作为目标下行波束。
本申请实施例中,网络设备确定出的目标下行波束可以是一个波束,也可以是多个波束,具体个数本发明不做限制。
步骤203,终端设备处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态,根据资源配置信息,使用目标波束与网络设备之间进行数据传输。
在一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备可以根据资源配置信息,使用目标波束与处于无线接入控制RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态的终端设备进行数据传输。
通过方案可以看出,终端设备处于RRC非激活态或RRC空闲态时,通过预先获取的资源配置信息所对应的资源进行数据传输,由于终端设备在传输数据时可以不用进入RRC连接态,因此可以减小时延和信令开销。
另一方面,由于NR中有波束的概念,若终端设备在通过资源配置信息所配置的上行 资源进行数据传输的过程中,并未确定出目标上行波束和目标下行波束,则终端设备不知道应该在哪个波束上发PUSCH,而且也不知道应该在哪个波束上接收PDSCH。如此,则可能导致终端设备和网络设备之间无法基于资源配置信息所配置的资源的机制进行数据传输,或者,终端设备和网络设备之间能耗较大。
举个例子,若终端设备并未确定出目标上行波束,则终端设备需要在不同的上行波束上发送相同的数据,而且,网络设备需要分时在不同的波束方向上盲检,如此,则加大了终端设备和网络设备的能耗。再举个例子,若终端设备并未确定出目标下行波束,则网络设备需要在不同的下行波束上发送相同的数据,而且,终端设备需要在不同的波束上监听,如此,则加大了终端设备和网络设备的能耗。而本申请中终端设备可以确定出目标波束,进而基于目标波束进行数据传输,如此,相比前述并未确定出目标上行波束和目标下行波束的方案来看,可以减少终端设备和网络设备的能耗。
在一种可能的实施方式中,本申请实施例中网络设备配置的资源配置信息发送给终端设备后,终端设备可以对其进行保存,该资源配置信息的有效期可以有多种实现方式,比如,可以在下次进入连接态之前,当有数据需要传输时,均使用该资源配置信息进行数据传输。也就是说,处于RRC连接态的终端设备获取资源配置信息之后,当下次进入RRC连接态时,该资源配置信息失效。网络设备可以在终端设备下次进入RRC连接态时重新为终端设备配置资源配置信息。网络设备两次为终端设备配置的资源配置信息可以相同,也可以不同,可选地,终端设备对此配置进行保存的操作,可以是协议预定义的、或者是网络设备指示终端设备保存此配置,举个例子,网络设备可以在指示终端设备进入RRC空闲态时,指示终端设备保存此配置,换句话说不将在连接态获取的资源配置信息释放掉;同理,网络设备可以指示终端设备接入RRC非激活态时,指示终端设备保存此配置。
在又一种可能的实施方式中,该资源配置信息的有效期对应的时间段中,终端设备可以有一次或多次进入RRC连接态。比如,终端设备可以一次RRC的连接态下获取资源配置信息之后,当下次进入RRC连接态时,该资源配置信息不失效,网络设备在当前次RRC连接态可以不为终端设备分配资源配置信息。如此,可以减少为终端设备分配资源配置信息的次数,从而减少信令消耗。可选地,该资源配置信息的有效期对应的时间段中,终端设备可以进入RRC连接态的次数可以是预设的,也可以是终端设备自己决定的。比如终端设备根据一个资源配置信息传输数据,重传多次也失败时,则可以确定该资源配置信息失效,在下次进入RRC连接态时重新请求获取资源配置信息。
基于上述内容,图2b示例性示出了本申请实施例提供另一种数据传输方法的流程示意图,如图2b所示,该方法在上述图2a的基础上,在步骤201之前增加了步骤211:
步骤211,终端设备向网络设备发送第一请求。第一请求用于请求资源配置信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中,第一请求也可以称为预配置资源请求,英文可以写为pre-configured resource Configuration request。
本申请实施例中,在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态可以与网络设备之间进行数据传输的这一个过程可以称为第一过程,或者称为通过预配置资源进行数据传输的过程等,也可以有其他名称,为了后续引用方便,本申请将其称为第一过程。
而为了触发第一过程,可以设置有“触发条件”,“触发条件”也可以称为第一条件等 其他名称,为了后续引用方便,本申请实施例中暂时以“触发条件”称呼,该名称并不具有其他限定意义。
终端设备确定触发了第一过程,当终端设备需要使用第一过程时(即通过所配置的资源在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态与网络设备之间传输数据),则可以启动第一过程。也可以说,在终端设备触发第一过程之前(或者说终端设备在可以使用第一过程在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态与网络设备之间传输数据之前),需要满足触发条件。
在又一种可能的实施方式中,在上述步骤211中,当前述触发条件满足时,终端设备可以向网络设备发送第一请求。在另一种可能的实施方式中,除了提到触发条件之外,也可以有其他的条件,当触发条件以及其他条件(比如终端设备处于连接态)均满足时,终端设备向网络设备发送第一请求。或者可以说,在该另一种可能的实施方式中,在至少满足了触发条件的情况下,终端设备向网络设备发送第一请求。
上述内容提到的触发条件可以包括下述的条件1或下述的条件2。在又一种可能的实施方式中,上述内容提到的触发条件可以包括条件1和条件2。
条件1包括:终端设备确定当前待发送业务数据包的大小(size)不大于终端设备类型对应的数据包尺寸阈值。
在一种可能的实施方式中,条件1的一种可能的英文的撰写方式包括:“the size of the resulting MAC PDU including the total UL data size of the traffic is smaller than or equeal to the maximum supported TBS based on the UE category。”
在一种可能的实施方式中,数据包的大小也可以称为数据包的尺寸。数据包的大小的英文可以写为size。
基于条件1的一种可能的实施方式中,基于终端设备类别,终端设备确定当前待发送业务数据包的大小(size)不大于终端设备对应的最大支持传输数据块大小(Transport Block Size,TBS)。数据包尺寸阈值可以是TBS。基于条件1可以看出,本申请实施例提供的方案可以适用于小数据的传输(small data transmission)。当终端设备在NR网络中需传输量较少的数据时,可以不用进入RRC连接态来进行数据传输,在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态下进行数据的传输,从而可以减小时延和信令开销。
举个例子,如果业务的上行数据包大小为10字节,假设业务数据包经过各层处理后(加各层包头、MAC层复用操作等)后所得的MAC PDU对应的尺寸(size)为20字节。终端设备的类别对应的最大支持TBS大小为30字节。由于20字节小于30字节,因此该示例满足该触发条件。
表1示例性示出了一种可能地终端设备类型与数据包尺寸阈值的对应关系表,如该表所示,终端设备的类型(或称类别)(第一列)对应的最大支持传输块大小TBS(第二列)可参见表1所示。
表1终端设备类型与数据包尺寸阈值的对应关系表
本申请实施例中,条件2可以包括以下内容中的任一项:
终端设备接收来自网络设备的第八指示信息;
终端设备接收来自网络设备的第九指示信息和第十指示信息;
终端设备接收来自网络设备的第九指示信息或第十指示信息。
其中:第八指示信息用于指示网络设备对应的小区支持终端设备通过资源配置信息所配置的资源进行数据传输。相应地,当终端设备接收到第八指示信息时,在终端设备通过网络设备连接至网络的情况下,网络设备支持终端设备通过资源配置信息所配置的资源进行数据传输。
第九指示信息用于指示在终端设备通过网络设备连接到5G核心网的情况下,网络设备支持终端设备通过资源配置信息所配置的资源进行数据传输。本申请实施例中提到的“5G核心网”可以替换为“第一类型核心网”,两者是可以替换。其中,第一类型核心网可以是5G核心网,也可以是6G核心网或未来演进技术对应的核心网等,这里不做限定。
第十指示信息用于指示在终端设备通过网络设备连接到演进型分组核心网EPC的情况下,网络设备支持终端设备通过资源配置信息所配置的资源进行数据传输。
在一种上述条件2可能的实施方式中,可以通过预设比特位的值来进行指示。举个例子,在条件2包括有第八指示信息的实施方式中,可以在预设的信令的特定的比特位来指示。比如当该特定的比特位承载的值为“1”,则可以表示网络设备支持终端设备通过资源配置信息所配置的资源进行数据传输。也可以理解为网络设备下发的第八指示信息。再比如当该特定的比特位承载的值为“0”,则可以表示网络设备不支持终端设备通过资源配置信息所配置的资源进行数据传输。也可以理解为网络设备并未下发第八指示信息。
在一种上述条件2可能的实施方式中,可以通过预设比特位的值来进行指示。举个例子,在条件2包括有第九指示信息(可以包括有第十指示信息,也可以不包括有第十指示信息)的实施方式中,可以在预设的信令的特定的比特位来指示。比如当该特定的比特位承载的值为“1”,则可以表示在终端设备通过网络设备连接到5G核心网的情况下,网络设备支持终端设备通过资源配置信息所配置的资源进行数据传输。也可以理解为网络设备下发的第九指示信息。再比如当该特定的比特位承载的值为“0”,则可以表示在终端设备通过网络设备连接到5G核心网的情况下,网络设备不支持终端设备通过资源配置信息所配置的资源进行数据传输。也可以理解为网络设备并未下发第九指示信息。
在一种上述条件2可能的实施方式中,可以通过预设比特位的值来进行指示。举个例子,在条件2包括有第十指示信息(可以包括有第九指示信息,也可以不包括有第九指示 信息)的实施方式中,可以在预设的信令的特定的比特位来指示。比如当该特定的比特位承载的值为“1”,则可以表示在终端设备通过网络设备连接到演进型分组核心网EPC的情况下,网络设备支持终端设备通过资源配置信息所配置的资源进行数据传输。也可以理解为网络设备下发的第十指示信息。再比如当该特定的比特位承载的值为“0”,则可以表示在终端设备通过网络设备连接到演进型分组核心网EPC的情况下,网络设备不支持终端设备通过资源配置信息所配置的资源进行数据传输。也可以理解为网络设备并未下发第十指示信息。
随着目前5G网络的铺设,5G和EPC核心网共存的现象会持续一段时间,在这种情况下,终端设备可能会通过网络设备接入5G核心网,也可能通过该网络设备接入EPC核心网。而在上述条件2中包括有第九指示信息和/或第十指示信息时,可以将这两种网络制式下网络设备的能力区分开来,从而使网络设备的部署可以更加精细化。
在一种可能的实施方式中,上述条件2中提到的第八指示信息、第九指示信息和第十指示信息中的任一种指示信息可以承载于系统消息。比如可以承载于广播消息中。
在上述步骤211中,第一请求还可以用于向网络设备指示该终端设备有兴趣配置资源配置信息所配置的资源,并可以向网络设备提供与资源配置信息所配置的资源相关的信息,如此,网络设备可以基于该第一请求生成资源配置信息。
一种可能的实施方式中,第一请求中还可以包括如下内容中的至少一种:
终端设备所请求的资源配置信息所配置的资源的周期;
终端设备所请求的资源配置信息所配置的资源的起始位置;
终端设备所请求的资源配置信息所配置的资源的TBS;
终端设备所请求的资源配置信息所配置的资源的频域资源信息,例如可以包括频域资源大小、频域资源位置(所在的带宽部分(bandwidth part,BWP)信息)、频域资源对应的子载波间隔(Subcarrier Spacing,SCS)等;
第十二指示信息,用于指示终端设备期望通过RRC消息来确认正确接收到使用配置资源的接收;示例性的,第十二指示信息所指示的内容的英文可以写为:“Indicates RRC response message is preferred by the UE for acknowledging the reception of a transmission using PUR”。
示例地,第一请求消息可以是RRC消息。
在上述步骤201之前,终端设备向网络设备发送第五指示信息。
其中,第五指示信息用于指示:终端设备支持在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态进行数据传输(也可以理解为,终端设备具有在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态基于资源配置信息所配置的资源进行数据传输的能力)。
在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备可以通过一条新定义的信令传输上述第五指示信息。在又一种可能的实施方式中,可以通过终端设备的能力上报机制将第五指示信息作为终端设备的一种能力进行上报。在又一种可能的实施方式中,可以在上述步骤211之后,在上述步骤201之前,通过一条新定义的信令发送第五指示信息。在又一种可能的实施方式中,第五指示信息可以携带在上述步骤211的第一请求中。
在使用资源配置信息进行数据传输之前,可以执行以下内容中的至少一项,以便判定 通过步骤201收到的资源配置信息是否有效,从而在确定资源配置信息有效的情况下可以使用该资源配置信息所配置的资源(或者也可以说,通过以下内容中的至少一项判定资源配置信息所配置的资源是否可用):
确定定时提前(timing advance,TA)有效;
确定目标波束有效。
其中,目标波束包括目标上行波束和目标下行波束中的至少一项,因此,在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备根据资源配置信息,使用目标波束与网络设备之间进行数据传输之前,还包括以下至少一项:
确定定时提前TA有效;
确定目标上行波束有效;
确定目标下行波束有效。
在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备通过上述步骤201获取资源配置信息之后,终端设备可以基于该资源配置信息所配置的资源进行一次或者多次数据的传输。针对某一次终端设备使用该资源配置信息传输数据的时间可能与收到该资源配置信息之间间隔了一段时长,在该段时长内,终端设备可能会发生移动导致资源配置信息所配置的资源中的信息不再准确。基于此,可以通过判断上述定时提前TA有效和/或目标波束有效的方法确定资源配置信息是否有效。
处于RRC空闲态或处于RRC非激活态的终端设备如果使用资源进行上行传输时,需要有正确的定时提前TA。定时提前TA的目的是使距离网络设备不同距离的终端设备发送的上行传输可以同时到达网络设备或者到达时间在循环前缀(Cyclic Prefix,CP)范围内。定时提前TA由终端设备和网络设备之间的距离决定,随着终端设备的移动,终端设备需要更新定时提前TA,以保持上行同步。基于此,在一种可能的实施方式中,当确定定时提前TA有效时,可以确定资源配置信息有效。在另一种可能的实施方式中,在确定定时提前TA有效,且确定目标上行波束有效时,确定资源配置信息有效。在另一种可能的实施方式中,在确定定时提前TA有效,且确定目标下行波束有效时,确定资源配置信息有效。在另一种可能的实施方式中,在确定定时提前TA有效,且确定目标上行波束有效,且确定目标下行波束有效时,确定资源配置信息有效。
在一种可能的实施方式中,可以在确定定时提前TA有效,且资源配置信息中包括有用于指示目标上行波束的第一指示信息,且确定目标上行波束有效时,确定资源配置信息有效。在一种可能的实施方式中,可以在确定定时提前TA有效,且资源配置信息中包括有用于指示目标下行波束的第二指示信息,且确定目标下行波束有效时,确定资源配置信息有效。在一种可能的实施方式中,可以在确定定时提前TA有效,且资源配置信息中包括有用于指示目标下行波束的第二指示信息,且确定目标下行波束有效时,以及资源配置信息中包括有用于指示目标上行波束的第一指示信息,且确定目标上行波束有效时,确定资源配置信息有效。
在另一种可能的实施方式中,在目标上行波束有效时,确定资源配置信息有效。在另一种可能的实施方式中,在目标下行波束有效时,确定资源配置信息有效。在另一种可能的实施方式中,在目标上行波束和目标下行波束有效时,确定资源配置信息有效。
下面通过以下内容分别介绍几种确定定时提前TA有效和确定目标波束有效的方式。
其中,在一种可能的实施方式中,当下述条件c1、条件c2和条件c3中的至少一项满 足时,可以确定定时提前TA有效。在又一种可能的实施方式中,当下述条件c1、条件c2和条件c3中的至少两项满足时,可以确定定时提前TA有效。在又一种可能的实施方式中,当下述条件c1、条件c2和条件c3全都满足时,可以确定定时提前TA有效。
在一种可能的实施方式中,可以预先设定终端设备通过何种条件判断定时提前TA有效,或者,可以由终端设备自己选择通过何种条件判断定时提前TA有效。在又一种可能的实施方式中,可以通过指示信息来指示终端设备通过何种条件判断定时提前TA有效。举个例子,当资源配置信息中包括有定时器相关信息时,则指示终端设备至少需要确定上述条件c1是否满足。再举个例子,当资源配置信息中包括有第一阈值时,则指示终端设备至少需要确定:上述条件c2中“自前一次定时提前TA有效起,测得的服务小区参考信号接收功率RSRP增加量不大于第一阈值”是否满足。再举个例子,当资源配置信息中包括有第二阈值时,则指示终端设备至少需要确定:上述条件c2中“自前一次定时提前TA有效起,测得的服务小区参考信号接收功率RSRP减少量不大于第二阈值”是否满足。再举个例子,当资源配置信息中包括有定时提前TA有效区域的相关信息时,则指示终端设备至少需要确定上述条件c3是否满足。
条件c 1,定时提前TA有效的定时器处于运行状态。
在方式c1的一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备可以获取定时器的相关信息,比如上述资源配置信息中可以包括有:定时器的相关信息。
条件c 2,自前一次定时提前TA有效起,测得的服务小区参考信号接收功率RSRP增加量不大于第一阈值。或者,自前一次定时提前TA有效起,测得的服务小区参考信号接收功率RSRP减少量不大于第二阈值。其中,第一阈值和第二阈值可以分别设置,第一阈值和第二阈值可以相等,也可以不相等。第一阈值和第二阈值中的任一个可以为正数或负数。
条件c 3,终端设备当前所处的位置属于预设的定时提前TA有效区域内。
在上述条件c3中,终端设备可以根据星历或自身的位置信息判断终端设备当前是否处于定时提前TA有效区域中。定时提前TA有效区域的英文可以写为定时提前TA valid area。
终端设备可以获取定时提前TA有效区域的相关信息,定时提前TA有效区域的相关信息可以用于指示出定时提前TA有效区域。定时提前TA有效区域的相关信息可以包括地面区域范围的信息和/或角度信息。
本申请实施例中提到的星历可以是卫星星历,卫星星历可用于计算、预测、描绘、跟踪飞行体(比如卫星)的时间、位置、速度等运行状态,卫星星历能表达天体、卫星、航天器、导弹、太空垃圾等飞行体的精确参数。
其中,终端设备获取卫星星历的方式可以有多种,在一种可能的方式中,终端设备可以从网络设备或核心网设备获取卫星星历,比如终端设备接收来自网络设备的系统消息,系统消息中包括卫星星历;或者,终端设备接收来自核心网设备的非接入层(non-access stratum,NAS)消息,NAS消息中包括卫星星历。在又一种可能的方式中,卫星星历可以为预配置的,比如卫星星历可以存储于终端设备的用户识别模块(Subscriber Identity Module,SIM)卡中,进而终端设备可以从SIM卡中获取卫星星历。
进一步地,终端设备可以根据辅助参数判定自身当前所处的位置是否属于TA有效区域,辅助参数可以为地面区域范围的信息。例如辅助参数可以包括地面参考点的位置信息时,定时提前TA有效区域比如可以是以地面参考点(比如可以为一个小区的中心)为中 心,以预设距离(预设距离也属于辅助参数)为半径的一个区域范围。
辅助参数也可以为角度信息,例如可以是一个角度值,第一条线和第二条线之间的夹角小于该角度值,其中,第一条线可以是预设位置(例如可以是网络设备或卫星的位置)与小区的中心的连线,第二条线可以是定时提前TA有效区域内的一个位置与预设位置(例如可以是网络设备或卫星的位置)之间的连线。图2c示例性示出了一种定时提前TA有效区域的示意图,如图2c所示,第一条线和第二条线之间的夹角可以如上述图2c中的(a)示出的角度140。第一条线和第二条线之间的夹角可以如上述图2c中的(b)示出的角度140。
在一种可能的实施方式中,本申请实施例中,当小区覆盖范围较小时,终端设备可以通过上述条件c2中提到的接收信号强度(e.g RSRP)来判断自身处于小区中心还是小区边缘,也就是说,当小区覆盖范围较小时,终端设备可以通过上述条件c2来判断定时提前TA是否有效。在有一种可能的实施方式中,当小区覆盖范围较大(例如卫星场景-NTN),经过仿真可知,处于小区中心的终端设备和处于小区边缘的终端设备之间的RSRP变化量较小,这种情况下,可以至少通过条件c3来判断定时提前TA是否有效,从而提高判断定时提前TA是否有效的准确度。
在一种可能的实施方式中,当下述条件d1满足时,可以确定目标上行波束有效。在又一种可能的实施方式中,当下述条件d2或下述条件d3满足时,可以确定目标下行波束有效。在又一种可能的实施方式中,当下述条件d2和下述条件d3全都满足时,可以确定目标下行波束有效。
在一种可能的实施方式中,可以预先设定终端设备通过何种条件判断目标下行波束有效,或者,可以由终端设备自己选择通过何种条件判断目标下行波束有效。在又一种可能的实施方式中,可以通过指示信息来指示终端设备通过何种条件判断目标下行波束有效。
资源配置信息包括第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示目标上行波束,目标波束包括目标上行波束:
条件d1:在第一时间段内,并未收到第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示更新后的目标上行波束,第一时间段是自终端设备在收到资源配置信息起始至当前的时间段。
在一种可能的实施方式中,方式d1可以替换为:自上次收到最新的用于指示目标上行波束的指示信息(是指收到的第一指示信息和第三指示信息中最新的一条指示信息)之后,截止当前时刻,并未收到其他用于指示更新后的目标上行波束的指示信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中,第一时间段可以为预定义的。在又一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备接收来自网络设备的用于指示第一时间段的指示信息。在一种可能的实施方式中,用于指示第一时间段的指示信息承载于系统消息、RRC层的消息、DCI和MAC CE中的一项。在一种可能的实施方式中,用于指示第一时间段的指示信息可以仅仅指示出第一时间段的时长,而第一时间段的起始位置和结束位置可以是预先定义的。在又一种可能的实施方式中,用于指示第一时间段的指示信息可以指示出第一时间段的时长和第一时间段的起始位置,而第一时间段的结束位置可以是预先定义的。在又一种可能的实施方式中,用于指示第一时间段的指示信息可以指示出第一时间段的时长和第一时间段的结束位置,而第一时间段的起始位置可以是预先定义的。在又一种可能的实施方式中,用于指示第一时间段的指示信息可以指示出第一时间段的时长、第一时间段的起始位置和结束位置。
条件d2:在第二时间段内,并未收到第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示更新后的 目标下行波束,第二时间段是自终端设备在收到资源配置信息起始至当前的时间段。
在一种可能的实施方式中,方式d2可以替换为:自上次收到最新的用于指示目标下行波束的指示信息(是指收到的第二指示信息和第四指示信息中最新的一条指示信息)之后,截止当前时刻,并未收到其他用于指示更新后的目标下行波束的指示信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中,第二时间段可以为预定义的。在又一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备接收来自网络设备的用于指示第二时间段的指示信息。在一种可能的实施方式中,用于指示第二时间段的指示信息承载于系统消息、RRC层的消息、DCI和MAC CE中的一项。在一种可能的实施方式中,用于指示第二时间段的指示信息可以仅仅指示出第二时间段的时长,而第二时间段的起始位置和结束位置可以是预先定义的。在又一种可能的实施方式中,用于指示第二时间段的指示信息可以指示出第二时间段的时长和第二时间段的起始位置,而第二时间段的结束位置可以是预先定义的。在又一种可能的实施方式中,用于指示第二时间段的指示信息可以指示出第二时间段的时长和第二时间段的结束位置,而第二时间段的起始位置可以是预先定义的。在又一种可能的实施方式中,用于指示第一时间段的指示信息可以指示出第一时间段的时长、第一时间段的起始位置和结束位置。
条件d3:终端设备根据第三预设规则确定出的下行波束(例如可以是SSB或者CSI-RS)与目标下行波束相同。
在一种可能的满足条件d3的实施方式中,终端设备接收网络设备发送的下行参考信号;终端设备对下行参考信号进行测量得到测量结果;终端设备根据下行参考信号的测量结果,确定质量最好的M个波束与目标下行波束中的M个波束相同,M为正整数。
基于条件d3的一种可能的实施方式中,在确定条件d3满足时,确定资源配置信息可用,否则,则确定资源配置信息所配置的资源不可用。对应英文可以写为:if SSB or CSI-RS selected is not changed from the one indicated by gNB,UE can use PUR-Config;Else,UE doesn’t use PUR-Config。
基于上述内容,图2d例性示出了本申请实施例提供另一种数据传输方法的流程示意图,用于更新目标上行波束。更新目标上行波束的方案可以包括下述步骤221至步骤223,该更新目标上行波束的方案可以和前面图2a和图2b中的任一个方案结合。在一种可能地实施方式中,可以在上述图2a和图2b的基础上,在步骤202之后且在步骤203之前增加步骤221至步骤223。在又一种可能地实施方式中,可以在上述图2a和图2b的基础上,在步骤203之后增加步骤221至步骤223。
步骤221,终端设备确定上行参考信号的配置信息。如图2d所示,该方法包括:
在步骤221中有多种可能的实现方式,比如下述方式e1和方式e2所示:
方式e1,终端设备接收来自网络设备的用于指示上行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。
对于方式e1,网络设备确定终端设备的上行参考信号的配置信息,并向终端设备下发指示。对于方e1,一种可能地实施方式中,用于指示上行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息为上行参考信号的配置信息,如此,终端设备接收来自网络设备的上行参考信号的配置信息,例如,网络设备为终端设备发送SRS config indication。又一种可能地实施方式中,用于指示上行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息可以是能够指示出上行参考信号的配置信息的信息,比如,用于指示上行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息可以指示:终端设备将连接态时的上行参考信号的配置信息作为空闲态或非激活态下的上行参考信号的配置信息。举 个例子,比如在一条预设的信令中的预设比特位,当该预设比特位上的比特值为1时,指示终端设备将连接态时的上行参考信号的配置信息作为空闲态或非激活态下的上行参考信号的配置信息。
在方式e1中,可以通过两条信令分别为终端设备发送资源配置信息和用于指示上行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。也可以通过一条信令向终端设备发送资源配置信息和用于指示上行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。比如,在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息包括用于指示上行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息,终端设备根据资源配置信息确定出上行参考信号的配置信息。
一种可能的实施方式中,在上述步骤201之前,在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备向网络设备发送第六指示信息。其中,第六指示信息用于指示:终端设备支持在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态发送上行参考信号(也可以理解为,终端设备具有在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态发送上行参考信号的能力)。在又一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备可以在接收到第六指示信息之后,为终端设备配置上行参考信号的配置信息,第六指示信息可以理解为一种能力上报,也可以理解为用于请求网络设备为终端设备配置上行参考信号的配置信息的请求。
在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备可以通过一条新定义的信令传输上述第六指示信息。在又一种可能的实施方式中,可以通过终端设备的能力上报机制将第六指示信息作为终端设备的一种能力进行上报。在又一种可能的实施方式中,可以在上述步骤211之后,在上述步骤201之前,通过一条新定义的信令发送第六指示信息。在又一种可能的实施方式中,第六指示信息可以携带在上述步骤211的第一请求中。
方式e2,终端设备根据第四预设规则,确定出上行参考信号的配置信息。
在方式e2中,终端设备可以根据第四预设规则确定上行参考信号的配置信息,一种可能的第四预设规则的实施方式中,终端设备确定处于连接态时使用的上行参考信号的配置信息为:上行参考信号的配置信息。这种实施方式中,可以理解为:在方式e2中,处于无线接入控制RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态的终端设备是使用连接态时的上行参考信号的配置信息发送上行参考信号的。
在一种可能的实施方式中,上行参考信号的配置信息可以为探测参考信号(Sounding reference signal,SRS)的配置信息。该SRS的配置可以定义SRS资源列表。
步骤222,终端设备处于无线接入控制RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态,终端设备根据上行参考信号的配置信息向网络设备发送上行参考信号。
步骤223,网络设备确定出更新后的目标上行波束,向终端设备发送第一消息,第一消息包括第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示更新后的目标上行波束。
在一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备在确定目标上行波束有变化时(即当前确定出的目标上行波束与前一次确定出的目标上行波束不同),向终端设备发送第一消息,第一消息包括第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示更新后的目标上行波束。
相对应地,终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一消息。在一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备可以根据资源配置信息中配置的资源接收来自网络设备的第一消息。
第一消息可以为DCI、MAC CE和RRC消息中的至少一项。在一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备可以在调度后续数据传输(subsequent data transmission,SDT)的DCI中携带第三指示信息,或者使用MAC CE来承载第三指示信息,此MAC CE可以在调度SDT的DCI 指示的PDSCH上发送。
在上述步骤223中,在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备还可以接收资源配置信息的标识和第三指示信息的生效时间中的至少一项。在一种可能的实施方式中,第一消息还包括资源配置信息的标识和第三指示信息的生效时间中的至少一项。在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息的标识和第三指示信息的生效时间以及第三指示信息可以承载于同一条信令中,如此,终端设备在上述步骤223之后需基于资源配置信息发送上行数据时,可以依据资源配置信息的标识确定出该更新后的目标上行波束,并依据第三指示信息的生效时间,在该更新后的目标上行波束生效期间,使用该更新后的目标上行波束发送数据。
本申请实施例中在资源配置信息所配置的资源的传输机制下,提供了一种更新目标上行波束的方案,且该更新目标上行波束的方案中终端设备和网络设备可以在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态完成,不需要进入RRC连接态以获取更新后的目标上行波束,从而可以节省信令开销。另一方面,由于终端设备可能会发生移动,目标上行波束可能不准确,当终端设备依据使用在RRC连接态下由网络设备配置的初始的目标上行波束时,可能会造成上行数据传输失败的情况发生,若网络设备在进行重传资源指示时,依旧并未更新目标上行波束,则重传也可能失败,可见,通过本申请实施例提供的方案更新目标上行波束,可以有利于SDT(Small Data Tansmission)的传输。
基于上述内容,图2e例性示出了本申请实施例提供另一种数据传输方法的流程示意图,用于更新目标下行波束。更新目标下行波束的方案可以包括下述步骤231至步骤233,该更新目标下行波束的方案可以和前面图2a和图2b中的任一个方案结合。在一种可能地实施方式中,可以在上述图2a和图2b的基础上,在步骤202之后且在步骤203之前增加步骤231至步骤233。在又一种可能地实施方式中,可以在上述图2a和图2b的基础上,在步骤203之后增加步骤231至步骤233。
步骤231,终端设备确定下行参考信号的配置信息;
在步骤231中有多种可能的实现方式,比如下述方式f1和方式f2所示:
方式f1,终端设备接收来自网络设备的用于指示下行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。
对于方式f1,网络设备确定终端设备的下行参考信号的配置信息,并向终端设备下发指示。对于方f1,一种可能地实施方式中,用于指示下行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息为下行参考信号的配置信息,如此,终端设备接收来自网络设备的下行参考信号的配置信息。又一种可能地实施方式中,用于指示下行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息可以是能够指示出下行参考信号的配置信息的信息,比如,用于指示下行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息可以指示:终端设备将连接态时的下行参考信号的配置信息作为空闲态或非激活态下的下行参考信号的配置信息。举个例子,比如在一条预设的信令中的预设比特位,当该预设比特位上的比特值为1时,指示终端设备将连接态时的下行参考信号的配置信息作为空闲态或非激活态下的下行参考信号的配置信息。
在方式f1中,比如可以通过两条信令分别为终端设备发送资源配置信息和用于指示下行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。也可以通过一条信令向终端设备发送资源配置信息和用于指示下行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。比如,在一种可能的实施方式中,资源配置信息包括用于指示下行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息,终端设备根据资源配置信息确定出下行参考信号的配置信息。在一种可能的实施方式中,当网络设备为终端设备发送用于指示上行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息,且网络设备为终端设备发送用于指示下行参 考信号的配置信息的指示信息时,用于指示上行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息、用于指示下行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息和资源配置信息中的任两项可以在同一条信令中,也可以在不同的两条信令中。
一种可能的实施方式中,在上述步骤201之前,在上述步骤201之前,在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备向网络设备发送第七指示信息。其中,第七指示信息用于指示:终端设备支持在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态测量下行参考信号。第七指示信息也可以用于指示终端设备支持在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态测量下行参考信号,并将得到的测量结果上报至网络设备(也可以理解为,终端设备具有:在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态测量下行参考信号,并将得到的测量结果上报至网络设备的能力)。
在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备可以通过一条新定义的信令传输上述第七指示信息。在又一种可能的实施方式中,可以通过终端设备的能力上报机制将第七指示信息作为终端设备的一种能力进行上报。在又一种可能的实施方式中,可以在上述步骤211之后,在上述步骤201之前,通过一条新定义的信令发送第七指示信息。在又一种可能的实施方式中,第七指示信息可以携带在上述步骤211的第一请求中。
方式f2,终端设备根据第六预设规则,确定出下行参考信号的配置信息。
在方式f2中,终端设备可以根据第六预设规则确定下行参考信号的配置信息,一种可能的第六预设规则的实施方式中,终端设备确定处于连接态时使用的下行参考信号的配置信息为:下行参考信号的配置信息。这种实施方式中,可以理解为:在方式f2中,处于无线接入控制RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态的终端设备是使用连接态时的下行参考信号的配置信息发送下行参考信号的。
终端设备处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态,终端设备执行以下步骤:
步骤232,网络设备发送下行参考信号,终端设备根据下行参考信号的配置信息,对网络设备发送的下行参考信号进行测量,得到测量结果。
步骤233,终端设备向网络设备上报用于指示测量结果的指示信息。
在上述步骤233中,一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备可以将对各个波束的测量结果上报给网络设备,由网络设备选择出目标下行波束。
在上述步骤233中,又一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备根据测量结果和第五预设规则,确定出M个候选下行波束;M为正整数。终端设备根据资源配置信息向网络设备发送第十一指示信息(比如可以通过资源配置信息中的PUSCH配置信息发送第十一指示信息),第十一指示信息用于指示M个候选下行波束,更新后的目标下行波束为M个候选下行波束中的一个。在一种可能的实施方式中,M不大于N,N为网络设备配置的终端设备需上报的候选下行波束的数量。
在一种可能的实施方式中,第五预设规则包括以下内容中的至少一项:
M个候选下行波束中的候选下行波束包括:测量结果中信号质量不小于第一门限的下行波束;
依据信号质量,从高到低对K个下行波束排序,M个候选下行波束为K个下行波束中的前M个下行波束,K为大于M的整数,K个下行波束中的每个下行波束的信号质量不小于第一门限。
在一种可能的实施方式中,信号可以包括层一接收参考信号功率(layer 1 reference signal received power,L1-RSRP),层一接收参考信号质量(layer 1 reference signal received quality,L1-RSRQ)等。
举个例子,网络设备配置的M的值为3,终端设备通过测量确定有2个下行波束为候选下行波束,则终端设备可以上报该2个下行波束给网络设备。再举个例子,网络设备配置的M的值为3,终端设备通过测量确定有4个下行波束为候选下行波束,则终端设备依据信号质量,从高到低对4个下行波束排序,并将排序是前三个的候选下行波束上报给网络设备。
步骤234,网络设备确定更新后的目标下行波束。网络设备向终端设备发送第二消息,相对应地,终端设备接收第二消息,第二消息包括第四指示信息。第四指示信息用于指示更新后的目标下行波束。
在一种可能的实施方式中,处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态的终端设备可以根据资源配置信息接收第二消息。
一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备可以通过上报候选下行波束的方式,请求网络设备重新指示目标下行波束,即发送更新后的目标下行波束。再又一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备可以基于波束训练的方式,在确定目标下行波束有变化时(即当前确定出的目标下行波束与前一次确定出的目标下行波束不同),向终端设备发送第四指示信息。
第二消息可以为DCI、MAC CE和RRC消息中的至少一项。在一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备可以在调度后续数据传输(subsequent data transmission,SDT)的DCI中携带第四指示信息,或者使用MAC CE来承载第四指示信息,此MAC CE可以在调度SDT的DCI指示的PDSCH上发送。
在上述步骤233中,在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备还可以接收资源配置信息的标识和第四指示信息的生效时间中的至少一项。在一种可能的实施方式中,第二消息还包括:资源配置信息的标识和第四指示信息的生效时间中的至少一项。在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备还可以接收资源配置信息的标识和第四指示信息的生效时间以及第四指示信息可以承载于同一条信令中,如此,终端设备在上述步骤233之后需基于资源配置信息发送下行数据时,可以依据资源配置信息的标识确定出该更新后的目标下行波束,并依据第四指示信息的生效时间,在该更新后的目标下行波束生效期间,使用该更新后的目标下行波束发送数据。
本申请实施例中在资源配置信息所配置的资源的传输机制下,提供了一种更新目标下行波束的方案,且该更新目标下行波束的方案中终端设备和网络设备可以在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态完成,不需要进入RRC连接态以获取更新后的目标下行波束,从而可以节省信令开销。另一方面,由于终端设备可能会发生移动,目标下行波束可能不准确,当终端设备依据使用在RRC连接态下由网络设备配置的初始的目标下行波束时,可能会造成下行数据传输失败的情况发生,若网络设备在进行重传资源指示时,依旧并未更新目标下行波束,则重传也可能失败,可见,通过本申请实施例提供的方案更新目标下行波束,可以提高数据传输的成功率。
在一种可能的实施方式中,第三指示信息和第四指示信息可能承载于同一条信令中,也可能承载于不同的信令中(也可以理解上述第一消息和第二消息可以是同一条消息,也可以是两条不同的消息)。该信令中还可以包括有资源配置信息的标识。可选地,还可以包括有第四指示信息的生效时间和第三指示信息的生效时间,在一种可能的实施方式中,第四指示信息的生效时间和第三指示信息的生效时间可以是同一个时间。图2f示例性示出 了一种信令的结构示意图,如图2f所示,在图2f的信令中可以承载波束标识(beam ID),该波束的标识可以是第三指示信息和第四指示信息中的至少一项。如图2f所示,该信令中还包括有预留位,预留位用R表示,预留位上可以承载资源配置信息的标识。可选地,预留位上还可以承载第四指示信息的生效时间和第三指示信息的生效时间。
需要说明的是,上述各个消息的名称仅仅是作为示例,随着通信技术的演变,上述任意消息均可能改变其名称,但不管其名称如何发生变化,只要其含义与本申请上述消息的含义相同,则均落入本申请的保护范围之内。
上述主要从各个网元之间交互的角度对本申请提供的方案进行了介绍。可以理解的是,上述实现各网元为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本发明能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本发明的范围。
根据前述方法,图3为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的结构示意图,如图3所示,该通信装置可以为终端设备或网络设备,也可以为芯片或电路,比如可设置于终端设备的芯片或电路,再比如可设置于网络设备内的芯片或电路。
进一步的,该通信装置1301还可以进一步包括总线系统,其中,处理器1302、存储器1304、收发器1303可以通过总线系统相连。
应理解,上述处理器1302可以是一个芯片。例如,该处理器1302可以是现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA),可以是专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC),还可以是系统芯片(system on chip,SoC),还可以是中央处理器(central processor unit,CPU),还可以是网络处理器(network processor,NP),还可以是数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor,DSP),还可以是微控制器(micro controller unit,MCU),还可以是可编程控制器(programmable logic device,PLD)或其他集成芯片。
在实现过程中,上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器1302中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器1302中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器1304,处理器1302读取存储器1304中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。
应注意,本申请实施例中的处理器1302可以是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介 质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。
可以理解,本申请实施例中的存储器1304可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。应注意,本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。
该通信装置1301对应上述方法中的终端设备的情况下,该通信装置可以包括处理器1302、收发器1303和存储器1304。该存储器1304用于存储指令,该处理器1302用于执行该存储器1304存储的指令,以实现如上图1a至图2f中所示的任一项或任多项对应的方法中终端设备的相关方案。
当通信装置1301为上述终端设备,收发器1303,用于接收来自网络设备的资源配置信息。处理器1302,用于确定目标波束,在终端设备处于无线接入控制RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态的情况下,根据资源配置信息,使用目标波束通过收发器1303与网络设备进行数据传输,目标波束包括目标上行波束和目标下行波束中的至少一个。
当通信装置1301为上述终端设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器1302,具体用于:根据通过收发器1303接收到的来自网络设备的第一指示信息确定目标波束,第一指示信息用于指示目标上行波束;或者,根据第一预设规则,确定目标上行波束。
当通信装置1301为上述终端设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器1302,具体用于:确定在RRC连接态最后一次传输PUSCH时所使用的上行波束为目标上行波束。
当通信装置1301为上述终端设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器1302,具体用于:根据通过收发器1303接收到的来自网络设备的第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示目标下行波束;或者,根据第二预设规则,确定目标下行波束。
当通信装置1301为上述终端设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器1302,具体用于:确定在RRC连接态最后一次监听物理下行控制信道PDCCH时机所在的控制资源集合对应的下行波束为:目标下行波束;
或者;
确定预设标识的控制资源集合对应的下行波束为目标下行波束。
当通信装置1301为上述终端设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器1302在通过收发器1303与网络设备之间进行数据传输之前,还用于执行以下至少一项:确定目标波束有效;确定定时提前TA有效。
当通信装置1301为上述终端设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器1302,具体用于在确定满足以下至少一项时,确定定时提前TA有效:定时提前TA有效的定时器处于 运行状态;自前一次定时提前TA有效起,测得的服务小区参考信号接收功率RSRP增加量不大于第一阈值;自前一次定时提前TA有效起,测得的服务小区参考信号接收功率RSRP减少量不大于第二阈值;终端设备当前所处的位置属于预设的定时提前TA有效区域内。
当通信装置1301为上述终端设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器1302,还用于:确定在第一时间段内未通过收发器1303收到第三指示信息,确定目标上行波束有效;第三指示信息用于指示更新后的目标上行波束。
当通信装置1301为上述终端设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器1302,具体用于根据以下至少一项,确定目标下行波束有效:根据第三预设规则确定出的下行波束与目标下行波束相同;确定在第二时间段内未通过收发器1303收到第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示更新后的目标下行波束。
当通信装置1301为上述终端设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,收发器1303,还用于:接收网络设备发送的下行参考信号。处理器1302,具体用于:对下行参考信号进行测量得到测量结果;终端设备根据下行参考信号的测量结果,确定质量最好的M个波束与目标下行波束中的M个波束相同,M为正整数。
当通信装置1301为上述终端设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,收发器1303,还用于:向网络设备发送第一请求,第一请求用于请求资源配置信息。
当通信装置1301为上述终端设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,收发器1303,还用于:向网络设备发送第五指示信息、第六指示信息和第七指示信息中的至少一项。其中,第五指示信息用于指示终端设备支持在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态进行数据传输;第六指示信息用于指示终端设备支持在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态发送上行参考信号;第七指示信息用于指示终端设备支持在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态测量下行参考信号。
当通信装置1301为上述终端设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器1302在通过收发器1303与网络设备进行数据传输之前,还用于:确定满足以下条件中的至少一项:
通过收发器1303接收来自网络设备的第八指示信息;或者,通过收发器1303接收来自网络设备的第九指示信息和第十指示信息中的至少一项;
当前待发送业务数据包的大小不大于终端设备对应的最大支持传输数据块大小。
当通信装置1301为上述终端设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,收发器1303,还用于:当终端设备处于无线接入控制RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态,根据上行参考信号的配置信息,向网络设备发送上行参考信号。
当通信装置1301为上述终端设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,收发器1303,还用于:接收来自网络设备的第一消息;第一消息包括第三指示信息、资源配置信息的标识和第三指示信息的生效时间中的至少一项。
当通信装置1301为上述终端设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器1302,还用于:通过收发器1303接收来自网络设备的用于指示上行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息;或者,根据第四预设规则,确定出上行参考信号的配置信息。
当通信装置1301为上述终端设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器1302,具体用于:确定处于连接态时使用的上行参考信号的配置信息为:上行参考信号的配置信息。
当通信装置1301为上述终端设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器1302,还用于:当终端设备处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态,根据下行参考信号的配置信息,对网络设 备发送的下行参考信号进行测量,得到测量结果;通过收发器1303向网络设备发送用于指示测量结果的指示信息;根据资源配置信息通过收发器1303接收网络设备发送的第二消息;第二消息包括第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示更新后的目标下行波束。
当通信装置1301为上述终端设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器1302,还用于:根据测量结果和第五预设规则,确定出M个候选下行波束;M为正整数。收发器1303,还用于:向网络设备发送第十一指示信息,第十一指示信息用于指示M个候选下行波束,更新后的目标下行波束为M个候选下行波束中的一个。
当通信装置1301为上述终端设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器1302,还用于:根据通过收发器1303接收到的来自网络设备的用于指示下行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息,确定下行参考信号的配置信息;
或者,根据第六预设规则,确定出下行参考信号的配置信息,确定下行参考信号的配置信息。
当通信装置1301为上述终端设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器1302,具体用于:确定处于连接态时使用的下行参考信号的配置信息为:下行参考信号的配置信息。
当通信装置1301为上述终端设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,收发器1303,还用于:向网络设备发送确认消息;确认消息中承载资源配置信息的标识。
当通信装置1301为上述网络设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,收发器1303,用于向终端设备发送资源配置信息;处理器1302,用于确定目标波束,目标波束包括目标上行波束和目标下行波束中的至少一个;根据资源配置信息,使用目标波束与处于无线接入控制RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态的终端设备通过收发器1303进行数据传输。
当通信装置1301为上述网络设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,收发器1303,还用于:向终端设备发送第一指示信息和第二指示信息中的一项或两项,第一指示信息用于指示目标上行波束,第二指示信息用于指示目标下行波束。
当通信装置1301为上述网络设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,收发器1303,还用于:接收来自终端设备的第一请求,第一请求用于请求资源配置信息。
当通信装置1301为上述网络设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,收发器1303,还用于:接收来自终端设备的第五指示信息、第六指示信息和第七指示信息中的至少一项。
当通信装置1301为上述网络设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,收发器1303,还用于:向终端设备发送第八指示信息,第八指示信息用于指示网络设备对应的小区支持终端设备通过预配置资源进行数据传输,或者;
向终端设备发送第九指示信息和/或第十指示信息。
当通信装置1301为上述网络设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,收发器1303,还用于:接收来自处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态的终端设备的上行参考信号。处理器1302,还用于:根据上行参考信号确定出更新后的目标上行波束;通过收发器1303向终端设备发送第一消息;第一消息包括第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示更新后的目标上行波束。
当通信装置1301为上述网络设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,收发器1303,还用于:向终端设备发送用于指示上行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。
当通信装置1301为上述网络设备,在一种可能的实施方式中,处理器1302,还用于:确定下行参考信号的配置信息;根据下行参考信号的配置信息,通过收发器1303向终端设备发送下行参考信号;根据用于指示测量结果的指示信息,确定出更新后的目标下行波 束。收发器1303,还用于:接收终端设备发送的用于指示测量结果的指示信息;向终端设备发送第二消息;第二消息包括第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示更新后的目标下行波束。
在一种可能的实施方中,收发器1303,还用于:向终端设备发送用于指示下行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。
在一种可能的实施方中,收发器1303,还用于:接收终端设备发送的确认消息;确认消息中承载资源配置信息的标识。
该通信装置所涉及的与本申请实施例提供的技术方案相关的概念,解释和详细说明及其他步骤请参见前述方法或其他实施例中关于这些内容的描述,此处不做赘述。
根据前述方法,图4为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的结构示意图,如图4所示,通信装置1401可以包括通信接口1403、处理器1402和存储器1404。通信接口1403,用于输入和/或输出信息;处理器1402,用于执行计算机程序或指令,使得通信装置1401实现上述图1a至图2f的相关方案中终端设备侧的方法,或使得通信装置1401实现上述图1a至图2f的相关方案中网络设备侧的方法。本申请实施例中,通信接口1403可以实现上述图3的收发器1303所实现的方案,处理器1402可以实现上述图3的处理器1302所实现的方案,存储器1404可以实现上述图3的存储器1304所实现的方案,在此不再赘述。
基于以上实施例以及相同构思,图5为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意图,如图5所示,该通信装置1501可以为终端设备或网络设备,也可以为芯片或电路,比如可设置于终端设备或网络设备的芯片或电路。
该通信装置可以对应上述方法中的终端设备。该通信装置可以实现如上图1a至图2f中所示的任一项或任多项对应的方法中终端设备所执行的步骤。该通信装置可以包括处理单元1502、通信单元1503和存储单元1504。
其中,处理单元1502可以是处理器或控制器,例如可以是通用中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU),通用处理器,数字信号处理(digital signal processing,DSP),专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuits,ASIC),现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、硬件部件或者其任意组合。其可以实现或执行结合本申请公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框,模块和电路。处理器也可以是实现计算功能的组合,例如包括一个或多个微处理器组合,DSP和微处理器的组合等等。存储单元1504可以是存储器。通信单元1503是一种该装置的接口电路,用于从其它装置接收信号。例如,当该装置以芯片的方式实现时,该通信单元1503是该芯片用于从其它芯片或装置接收信号的接口电路,或者,是该芯片用于向其它芯片或装置发送信号的接口电路。
该通信装置1501可以为上述任一实施例中的终端设备或网络设备,还可以为用于进行小区搜索芯片。例如,当通信装置1501为终端设备或网络设备时,该处理单元1502例如可以是处理器,该通信单元1503例如可以是收发器。可选的,该收发器可以包括射频电路,该存储单元例如可以是存储器。例如,当通信装置1501为用于进行小区搜索的芯片时,该处理单元1502例如可以是处理器,该通信单元1503例如可以是输入/输出接口、管脚或电路等。该处理单元1502可执行存储单元存储的计算机执行指令,可选地,该存储单元为该芯片内的存储单元,如寄存器、缓存等,该存储单元还可以是该会话管理网元内的位于该芯片外部的存储单元,如只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)或可存储静态 信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)等。
通信装置1501为上述终端设备,通信单元1503,用于接收来自网络设备的资源配置信息。处理单元1502,用于确定目标波束,在终端设备处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态的情况下,根据资源配置信息,使用目标波束通过通信单元1503与网络设备进行数据传输,目标波束包括目标上行波束和目标下行波束中的至少一个。
通信装置1501为上述网络设备,通信单元1503,用于向终端设备发送资源配置信息。处理单元1502,用于确定目标波束,目标波束包括目标上行波束和目标下行波束中的至少一个;根据资源配置信息,使用目标波束与处于无线接入控制RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态的终端设备通过通信单元1503进行数据传输。
该通信装置所涉及的与本申请实施例提供的技术方案相关的概念,解释和详细说明及其他步骤请参见前述方法或其他实施例中关于这些内容的描述,此处不做赘述。
可以理解的是,上述通信装置1501中各个单元的功能可以参考相应方法实施例的实现,此处不再赘述。
应理解,以上通信装置的单元的划分仅仅是一种逻辑功能的划分,实际实现时可以全部或部分集成到一个物理实体上,也可以物理上分开。本申请实施例中,通信单元1503可以由上述图3的收发器1303实现,处理单元1502可以由上述图3的处理器1302实现。
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序代码或指令,当该计算机程序代码或指令在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图1a至图2f所示实施例中任意一个实施例的方法。
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读介质存储有程序代码,当该程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图1a至图2f所示实施例中任意一个实施例的方法。
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种芯片系统,该芯片系统可以包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合,可用于执行图1a至图2f所示实施例中任意一个实施例的方法。可选地,该芯片系统还包括存储器。存储器,用于存储计算机程序(也可以称为代码,或指令)。处理器,用于从存储器调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有芯片系统的设备执行图1a至图2f所示实施例中任意一个实施例的方法。
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种系统,其包括前述的一个或多个终端设备以及一个或多个网络设备。
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行计算机指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例的流程或功能。计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。可用介质可以是磁性介质 (例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,高密度数字视频光盘(digital video disc,DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如,固态硬盘(solid state disc,SSD))等。
需要指出的是,本专利申请文件的一部分包含受著作权保护的内容。除了对专利局的专利文件或记录的专利文档内容制作副本以外,著作权人保留著作权。
上述各个装置实施例中网络设备与终端设备和方法实施例中的网络设备或终端设备对应,由相应的模块或单元执行相应的步骤,例如通信单元(收发器)执行方法实施例中接收或发送的步骤,除发送、接收外的其它步骤可以由处理单元(处理器)执行。具体单元的功能可以参考相应的方法实施例。其中,处理器可以为一个或多个。
在本说明书中使用的术语“部件”、“模块”、“系统”等用于表示计算机相关的实体、硬件、固件、硬件和软件的组合、软件、或执行中的软件。例如,部件可以是但不限于,在处理器上运行的进程、处理器、对象、可执行文件、执行线程、程序和/或计算机。通过图示,在计算设备上运行的应用和计算设备都可以是部件。一个或多个部件可驻留在进程和/或执行线程中,部件可位于一个计算机上和/或分布在两个或更多个计算机之间。此外,这些部件可从在上面存储有各种数据结构的各种计算机可读介质执行。部件可例如根据具有一个或多个数据分组(例如来自与本地系统、分布式系统和/或网络间的另一部件交互的二个部件的数据,例如通过信号与其它系统交互的互联网)的信号通过本地和/或远程进程来通信。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各种说明性逻辑块(illustrative logical block)和步骤(step),能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。
作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储 介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以权利要求的保护范围为准。
Claims (38)
- 一种数据传输方法,其特征在于,包括:终端设备接收来自网络设备的资源配置信息;所述终端设备确定目标波束,所述目标波束包括目标上行波束和目标下行波束中的至少一个;所述终端设备处于无线接入控制RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态,所述终端设备根据所述资源配置信息,使用所述目标波束与所述网络设备进行数据传输。
- 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备确定目标波束,包括以下一项:所述终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的第一指示信息;所述第一指示信息用于指示所述目标上行波束;所述终端设备确定在RRC连接态最后一次传输PUSCH时所使用的上行波束为所述目标上行波束。
- 如权利要求1-2任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备确定目标波束,包括以下一项:所述终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的第二指示信息;所述第二指示信息用于指示所述目标下行波束;所述终端设备确定在RRC连接态最后一次监听物理下行控制信道PDCCH时机所在的控制资源集合对应的下行波束为:所述目标下行波束;所述终端设备确定预设标识的控制资源集合对应的下行波束为所述目标下行波束。
- 如权利要求1-3任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备根据所述资源配置信息,使用所述目标波束与所述网络设备之间进行数据传输之前,还包括以下至少一项:确定所述目标波束有效;确定定时提前TA有效。
- 如权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备在确定满足以下至少一项时,确定所述定时提前TA有效:定时提前TA有效的定时器处于运行状态;所述自前一次定时提前TA有效起,测得的服务小区参考信号接收功率RSRP增加量不大于第一阈值;所述自前一次定时提前TA有效起,测得的服务小区参考信号接收功率RSRP减少量不大于第二阈值;所述终端设备当前所处的位置属于预设的定时提前TA有效区域内。
- 如权利要求4或5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:所述终端设备确定在第一时间段内未收到第三指示信息,确定所述目标上行波束有效;所述第三指示信息用于指示更新后的目标上行波束。
- 如权利要求4-6任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备根据以下至少一项,确定所述目标下行波束有效:所述终端设备根据第三预设规则确定出的下行波束与所述目标下行波束相同;所述终端设备确定在第二时间段内未收到第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示 更新后的目标下行波束。
- 如权利要求1-7任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备接收来自网络设备的资源配置信息之前,还包括:所述终端设备向所述网络设备发送第一请求,所述第一请求用于请求所述资源配置信息。
- 如权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备接收来自网络设备的资源配置信息之前,还包括:所述终端设备向所述网络设备发送第五指示信息、第六指示信息和第七指示信息中的至少一项;其中,所述第五指示信息用于指示所述终端设备支持在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态进行数据传输;所述第六指示信息用于指示所述终端设备支持在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态发送上行参考信号;所述第七指示信息用于指示所述终端设备支持在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态测量下行参考信号。
- 如权利要求1-9任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备根据所述资源配置信息,使用所述目标波束与所述网络设备进行数据传输之前,还包括:满足以下条件中的至少一项:接收来自所述网络设备的第八指示信息;或者,接收来自所述网络设备的第九指示信息和第十指示信息中的至少一项;当前待发送业务数据包的大小不大于所述终端设备对应的最大支持传输数据块大小;其中,所述第八指示信息用于指示所述网络设备对应的小区支持所述终端设备通过预配置资源进行数据传输;所述第九指示信息用于指示:在所述终端设备通过所述网络设备连接到5G核心网的情况下,所述网络设备支持所述终端设备通过预配置资源进行数据传输;所述第十指示信息用于指示:在所述终端设备通过所述网络设备连接到演进型分组核心网EPC的情况下,所述网络设备支持所述终端设备通过预配置资源进行数据传输。
- 如权利要求1-10任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法,还包括:当所述终端设备处于无线接入控制RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态,所述终端设备根据上行参考信号的配置信息,向所述网络设备发送上行参考信号。
- 如权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述上行参考信号的配置信息,向所述网络设备发送上行参考信号之后,还包括:所述终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的第一消息;所述第一消息包括所述第三指示信息、所述资源配置信息的标识和所述第三指示信息的生效时间中的至少一项。
- 如权利要求11或12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备根据上行参考信号的配置信息,向所述网络设备发送上行参考信号之前,还包括:所述终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的用于指示所述上行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息;或者;所述终端设备确定处于连接态时使用的上行参考信号的配置信息为:所述上行参考信号的配置信息。
- 如权利要求1-13任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:当所述终端设备处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态,所述终端设备根据下行参考信号的配置信息,对所述网络设备发送的下行参考信号进行测量,得到测量结果;所述终端设备向所述网络设备发送用于指示所述测量结果的指示信息;所述终端设备根据所述资源配置信息接收所述网络设备发送的第二消息;所述第二消息包括第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示更新后的目标下行波束。
- 如权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二消息还包括:所述资源配置信息的标识和所述第四指示信息的生效时间中的至少一项。
- 如权利要求14-15任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备根据下行参考信号的配置信息,对所述网络设备发送的下行参考信号进行测量之前,还包括:所述终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的用于指示所述下行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息,确定所述下行参考信号的配置信息;或者;所述终端设备确定处于连接态时使用的下行参考信号的配置信息为:所述下行参考信号的配置信息。
- 如权利要求1-16任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述资源配置信息包括:资源配置信息的标识。
- 一种数据传输方法,其特征在于,包括:网络设备向终端设备发送资源配置信息;所述网络设备确定目标波束,所述目标波束包括目标上行波束和目标下行波束中的至少一个;所述网络设备根据所述资源配置信息,使用所述目标波束与处于无线接入控制RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态的所述终端设备进行数据传输。
- 如权利要求18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备确定目标波束之后,还包括:所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第一指示信息和第二指示信息中的一项或两项,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述目标上行波束,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述目标下行波束。
- 如权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,所述资源配置信息包括所述第一指示信息和所述第二指示信息中的一项或两项。
- 如权利要求18-20任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备向终端设备发送资源配置信息之前,还包括:所述网络设备接收来自所述终端设备的第一请求,所述第一请求用于请求所述资源配置信息。
- 如权利要求21所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备向终端设备发送资源配置信息之前,还包括:所述网络设备接收来自所述终端设备的第五指示信息、第六指示信息和第七指示信息中的至少一项;其中,所述第五指示信息用于指示所述终端设备支持在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态进行数据传输;所述第六指示信息用于指示所述终端设备支持在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态发送上行参考信号;所述第七指示信息用于指示所述终端设备支持在RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态测量下行参考信号。
- 如权利要求22所述的方法,其特征在于,第五指示信息、第六指示信息和第七指示信息中的至少一项承载于所述第一请求中。
- 如权利要求18-23任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备根据所述资源配置信息,使用所述目标波束与处于无线接入控制RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态的所述终端设备进行数据传输之前,还包括:所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第八指示信息,所述第八指示信息用于指示所述网络设备对应的小区支持所述终端设备通过预配置资源进行数据传输,或者;所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第九指示信息和/或第十指示信息;其中,所述第九指示信息用于指示在所述终端设备通过所述网络设备连接到5G核心网的情况下,所述网络设备支持所述终端设备通过预配置资源进行数据传输;所述第十指示信息用于指示在所述终端设备通过所述网络设备连接到演进型分组核心网EPC的情况下,所述网络设备支持所述终端设备通过预配置资源进行数据传输。
- 如权利要求18-24任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法,还包括:所述网络设备接收来自处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态的终端设备的上行参考信号;所述网络设备根据所述上行参考信号确定出更新后的目标上行波束;所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第一消息;所述第一消息包括第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示更新后的目标上行波束。
- 如权利要求25所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一消息还包括所述资源配置信息的标识和所述第三指示信息的生效时间中的至少一项。
- 如权利要求25-26任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备接收来自处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态的终端设备的上行参考信号之前,还包括:所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送用于指示所述上行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。
- 如权利要求27所述的方法,其特征在于,所述资源配置信息包括用于指示所述上行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。
- 如权利要求18-28任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法,还包括:所述网络设备确定下行参考信号的配置信息;所述网络设备根据所述下行参考信号的配置信息,向所述终端设备发送下行参考信号;所述网络设备接收所述终端设备发送的用于指示所述测量结果的指示信息;所述网络设备根据用于指示所述测量结果的指示信息,确定出更新后的目标下行波束;所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第二消息;所述第二消息包括第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示更新后的目标下行波束。
- 如权利要求29所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二消息还包括:所述资源配置信息的标识和所述第四指示信息的生效时间中的至少一项。
- 如权利要求29-30任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备确定下行参考信号的配置信息之后,还包括:所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送用于指示所述下行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。
- 如权利要求31所述的方法,其特征在于,所述资源配置信息包括用于指示所述下行参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。
- 如权利要求18-32任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述资源配置信息包括:资源配置信息的标识。
- 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述装置包括处理器和存储器,所述存储器,用于存储可执行程序;所述处理器,用于执行存储器中的计算机可执行程序,使得权利要求1-33中任一项所述的方法被执行。
- 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述装置包括处理器和收发器,所述收发器,用于输入和/或输出信息;所述处理器,用于执行计算机可执行程序,使得权利要求1-33中任一项所述的方法被执行。
- 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述装置包括处理器和通信接口,所述通信接口,用于输入和/或输出信息;所述处理器,用于执行计算机可执行程序,使得权利要求1-33中任一项所述的方法被执行。
- 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机可执行程序,所述计算机可执行程序在被计算机调用时,使所述计算机执行如权利要求1至33任一项所述的方法。
- 一种芯片系统,其特征在于,包括:所述通信接口,用于输入和/或输出信息;处理器,用于执行计算机可执行程序,使得安装有所述芯片系统的设备执行如利要求1-33任一项所述的方法。
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2020/123021 WO2022082687A1 (zh) | 2020-10-22 | 2020-10-22 | 数据传输方法、装置、可读存储介质和系统 |
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2020/123021 WO2022082687A1 (zh) | 2020-10-22 | 2020-10-22 | 数据传输方法、装置、可读存储介质和系统 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2022082687A1 true WO2022082687A1 (zh) | 2022-04-28 |
Family
ID=81291393
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2020/123021 WO2022082687A1 (zh) | 2020-10-22 | 2020-10-22 | 数据传输方法、装置、可读存储介质和系统 |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
WO (1) | WO2022082687A1 (zh) |
Cited By (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2024031234A1 (en) * | 2022-08-08 | 2024-02-15 | Lenovo (Beijing) Limited | Methods and apparatuses for user equipment positioning |
WO2024065197A1 (zh) * | 2022-09-27 | 2024-04-04 | 北京小米移动软件有限公司 | 全球导航卫星系统gnss信息的生效时间确定方法及装置 |
WO2024125199A1 (zh) * | 2022-12-15 | 2024-06-20 | 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 | 波束指示方法、设备、装置及存储介质 |
WO2024199049A1 (zh) * | 2023-03-24 | 2024-10-03 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | 重复传输的方法、终端及网络侧设备 |
Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN109076383A (zh) * | 2016-05-12 | 2018-12-21 | 株式会社Kt | 用于由终端配置双连接的方法及其装置 |
CN109302720A (zh) * | 2017-07-25 | 2019-02-01 | 华为技术有限公司 | 一种选择波束的方法及设备 |
CN109565691A (zh) * | 2016-08-04 | 2019-04-02 | 株式会社Ntt都科摩 | 用户终端以及无线通信方法 |
US20190159274A1 (en) * | 2016-07-01 | 2019-05-23 | Kt Corporation | Method and device for transmitting or receiving data in dual connectivity state |
CN111586855A (zh) * | 2019-02-15 | 2020-08-25 | 华为技术有限公司 | 信号传输的方法与装置 |
-
2020
- 2020-10-22 WO PCT/CN2020/123021 patent/WO2022082687A1/zh active Application Filing
Patent Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN109076383A (zh) * | 2016-05-12 | 2018-12-21 | 株式会社Kt | 用于由终端配置双连接的方法及其装置 |
US20190159274A1 (en) * | 2016-07-01 | 2019-05-23 | Kt Corporation | Method and device for transmitting or receiving data in dual connectivity state |
CN109565691A (zh) * | 2016-08-04 | 2019-04-02 | 株式会社Ntt都科摩 | 用户终端以及无线通信方法 |
CN109302720A (zh) * | 2017-07-25 | 2019-02-01 | 华为技术有限公司 | 一种选择波束的方法及设备 |
CN111586855A (zh) * | 2019-02-15 | 2020-08-25 | 华为技术有限公司 | 信号传输的方法与装置 |
Cited By (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2024031234A1 (en) * | 2022-08-08 | 2024-02-15 | Lenovo (Beijing) Limited | Methods and apparatuses for user equipment positioning |
WO2024065197A1 (zh) * | 2022-09-27 | 2024-04-04 | 北京小米移动软件有限公司 | 全球导航卫星系统gnss信息的生效时间确定方法及装置 |
WO2024125199A1 (zh) * | 2022-12-15 | 2024-06-20 | 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 | 波束指示方法、设备、装置及存储介质 |
WO2024199049A1 (zh) * | 2023-03-24 | 2024-10-03 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | 重复传输的方法、终端及网络侧设备 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
EP3603165B1 (en) | System and method for beam management procedure configuration | |
US20210044956A1 (en) | Method of connection control for direct communication between terminals, and apparatus therefor | |
WO2022082687A1 (zh) | 数据传输方法、装置、可读存储介质和系统 | |
US12120669B2 (en) | Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving data in wireless communication system | |
WO2017084607A1 (zh) | 一种下行同步的方法、装置及系统 | |
WO2018141272A1 (zh) | 终端、网络设备和通信方法 | |
CN113261224A (zh) | 用于单dci多时隙调度的harq处理 | |
WO2019029330A1 (zh) | 一种辅小区激活方法、接入网设备、通信装置以及系统 | |
EP3432678B1 (en) | Device and method of configuring a secondary node and reporting in dual connectivity | |
WO2022033274A1 (zh) | 通信方法、用户设备、网络设备及计算机可读存储介质 | |
US11252675B2 (en) | Method for transmitting sidelink signals through plurality of carriers in wireless communication system | |
WO2020042123A1 (zh) | 发送上行信号的方法和设备 | |
WO2021003620A1 (zh) | 下行信号传输的方法和设备 | |
TWI829756B (zh) | 一種通訊方法、終端設備和網路設備 | |
CN113767585A (zh) | 利用下行链路(dl)半持久调度的针对多个物理下行链路共享信道(pdsch)的混合自动重传请求(harq)反馈 | |
WO2022024042A1 (en) | Csi feedback for multi-trp urllc schemes | |
WO2020206581A1 (zh) | 传输信号的方法、终端设备和网络设备 | |
US20230139655A1 (en) | Method and device for beam failure recovery, user equipment | |
US20230224732A1 (en) | Method and device for recovering beam failure in wireless communication system | |
WO2021027739A1 (zh) | 波束失败恢复方法及装置 | |
EP4449788A1 (en) | Signaling to wake up a cell | |
EP4270809A1 (en) | Method and device for recovering beam failure in wireless communication system | |
WO2022147711A1 (zh) | 信号处理方法、装置、设备及存储介质 | |
CN118266251A (zh) | 传播延迟补偿增强 | |
AU2021426270A1 (en) | Transmission method and communication apparatus |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 20958269 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 20958269 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |